JP2021053436A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To determine whether the original count value of a two-byte storage area is 0 or not, without determining the values of both upper and lower bytes.SOLUTION: In medal release device control times in, for example, F028 and F029 that are two-type storage areas, timer values of 0 to 2686(D) and 0 to 0A7E(H) are counted to count a predetermined time. In a case where the predetermined condition is satisfied, 0B7D(H) in which FF(H) is added to 0A7E(H) is stored, as an initial value, in the two-byte storage areas. When the timing of updating a count value reaches, one is subtracted from the count value of each two-byte storage area. Of the count values of the two-type storage areas, if the value of the upper byte is 0, it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 31

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that updates a count value for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed.

In a conventional game machine, when it is decided to execute an effect, a delay time lottery is performed, the delay time obtained by this lottery is measured by a subtraction timer, and after the delay time elapses, a signal is sent to the effect execution circuit. Is known to start the production (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2002-052133

In the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when determining whether or not the count value consisting of 2 bytes (upper 1 byte, lower 1 byte) is "0", the values of both the upper byte and the lower byte are determined. There was a problem that it was necessary and program processing was required accordingly.
The problem to be solved by the present invention is to determine whether or not the original count value of the 2-byte storage area is "0" when updating the count value of the 2-byte storage area. It is to be feasible without judging both values of.

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following means (in parentheses, the configuration of the corresponding embodiment is shown). The invention according to the initial claim of the present application corresponds to the initial invention 5 among the initial inventions 1 to 8 described later.
The present invention
A 2-byte count value (0B7D (0B7D) for determining whether or not a predetermined time (medal payout device control time) has elapsed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the process proceeds to step S255 of FIG. 46). It is provided with a 2-byte storage area (F028 (H) and F029 (H)) for storing H)).
When it is time to update the count value (step S605 in FIG. 54), the count value in the storage area is subtracted by "1" (step S637 in FIG. 55).
When the value of the upper byte of the 2-byte count value becomes "0", it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed.

According to the present invention, when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed, it is only necessary to determine whether or not the value of the high-order byte is "0" (the value of the low-order byte is read and determined). (Because it is not necessary), the program capacity can be reduced and the processing speed can be increased.

It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the control of the slot machine in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is a figure which shows the display window (transparent window) provided in the slot machine, the positional relationship of each reel, the effective line and the like. It is a figure (1) which shows the type of a combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of symbols. It is a figure (2) which shows the type of a combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of symbols. It is a figure (3) which shows the type of a combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of symbols. It is a figure (4) which shows the type of a combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of symbols. It is a figure (5) which shows the type of a combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of symbols. It is a figure (6) which shows the type of a combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of symbols. It is a figure (1) which shows the relationship between the condition device, the winning combination, and the push order. It is a figure (2) which shows the relationship between the condition device, the winning combination, and the push order. It is a figure (3) which shows the relationship between the condition device, the winning combination, and the push order. It is a figure (4) which shows the relationship between the condition device, the winning combination, and the push order. It is a figure (1) which shows the figurative number table. It is a figure (2) which shows the figurative number table. It is a figure which shows various LEDs on a display board. It is a figure explaining the detail of a digit and a segment. It is a figure which shows the input port 0-2 provided in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the output ports 0-3 provided in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the output ports 4 to 7 provided in the main control board. It is a figure which shows a part data (input port 0 level data, etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows a part data (input port 1 level data, etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows a part of data (input port 1 falling data, etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows a part data (specific information flag, etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows a part data (medal management flag, etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows a part of data (operating state flag, etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows a part data (automatic bet number data, etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows a part of data (interruption counter, etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows a part of data (winning and replay condition device information, etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows a part data (blocker, hopper motor drive signal data, etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows the timer value (external signal output time, etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a flowchart which shows program start processing (M_PRG_START). It is a flowchart which shows the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON). It is a flowchart which shows the main processing (M_MAIN) processing. It is a flowchart which shows the game start set (MS_GAME_SET) processing. It is a flowchart which shows the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). It is a flowchart which shows the control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET). It is a flowchart which shows the medal acceptance start (MS_MEDAL_START). It is a flowchart which shows the 2-byte time wait processing (R_2BYTE_WAIT). It is a flowchart which shows interrupt wait (C_INTR_WAIT). It is a flowchart which shows blocker-on (MS_BLOCKER_ON). It is a flowchart which shows waiting for medal insertion (MS_STANDBY_DSP). It is a flowchart which shows the medal management process (MS_MEDAL_CHK). It is a flowchart which shows blocker off (MS_BLOCKER_OFF). It is a flowchart which shows the settlement process (M_MEDAL_RET). It is a flowchart which shows the payout process (M_1MEDAL_PAY) of one medal. It is a flowchart following FIG. 46. It is a flowchart which shows the start switch check (M_START_CHK). It is a flowchart which shows the start switch acceptance (MS_START_CTL). It is a flowchart which shows the reel rotation start preparation (M_REEL_READY). It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop control (M_REEL_STOP). It is a flowchart which shows the medal payout (MS_WIN_PAY) by a prize. It is a flowchart which shows the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK). It is a flowchart which shows interrupt processing (I_INTR). It is a flowchart which shows the timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT). It is a flowchart which shows the passage sensor check (PATHSEN_CHK). It is a flowchart which shows the external signal output data management (IS_INF_CTL). It is a flowchart which shows the external signal output (IS_COUNTER_OUT). It is a flowchart which shows the condition device information output (I_CNDINF_OUT). It is a figure explaining the output example of the condition device information. It is a figure which shows the address arrangement of the timer value of the 2nd Embodiment (A-C), and is the figure corresponding to FIG. 31 of the 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer measurement (example 1) in the address arrangement and the reference address of 2nd Embodiment A. It is a flowchart which shows the address arrangement of 2nd Embodiment A and timer measurement (example 2) at a reference address. It is a flowchart which shows the address arrangement of 2nd Embodiment B and timer measurement at a reference address. It is a flowchart which shows the timer measurement (example 1) in the address arrangement and the reference address of 2nd Embodiment C. It is a flowchart which shows the address arrangement of 2nd Embodiment C and timer measurement (example 2) at a reference address.

In the present specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
"RT" means that the type (number) of the condition devices (1BB, replay, small winning combination) to be drawn and the winning probability thereof are in a unique lottery state, and "RT transition" is one. By shifting from RT to another RT, it means that the winning probability of at least one conditional device (for example, replay) to be a lottery target fluctuates. Therefore, the winning probability for each type of replay in one RT is a value peculiar to that RT, and the winning probability for each type of replay is the same for one RT and the other RT. Absent. However, it is permissible that the total value of the winning probabilities of the replay is the same for one RT and the other RT.

In this embodiment, the RT includes non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4 (FIGS. 14 and 15 described later).
Note that "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is equivalent to "RT0". Therefore, the term "RT" as used herein includes non-RT.
In the present embodiment, the non-internal part is non-RT, RT1, RT2, or RT3, and the internal part is RT4. The type (number) of replays to be drawn and the winning probability are different between non-internal and internal.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, 1BBA operation and 1BBB operation are provided as RTs during the special game. In this embodiment, at least one replay lottery is performed for both the 1BBA operation and the 1BBB operation. The “combination” refers to a lottery target, and in the present embodiment, a condition device is drawn by lottery, and the condition device is set to include at least one combination. Therefore, when any of the conditional devices is won, at least one winning combination is won (having at least one winning combination).

The condition device to be drawn includes a "character condition device" including one of "special roles (roles)" and a "winning and replay condition device" including either a small role or a replay. ..
The "feature condition device" includes any of the special roles. When a special role wins, SB (single bonus), RB (type 1 special character; regular bonus), CB (type 2 special character; challenge bonus), which are devices that make it easy to win a small role, 1BB (Type 1 accessory continuous operation device; Type 1 big bonus) and 2BB (Type 2 accessory continuous operation device; Type 2 big bonus) are activated.

Here, the first-class accessory continuous operation device (1BB) means a device capable of continuously operating the first-class special accessory (RB).
Similarly, the type 2 accessory continuous operation device (2BB) refers to a device capable of continuously operating the type 2 special accessory (CB).
In this embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special role, and has two types (1BBA and 1BBB) described later.
During the operation of 1BB, the RB ends when either the winning of two wins or the two games is satisfied, and after the end, the RB is operated again on condition that the end condition of the 1BB operation is not satisfied. ..
Further, in this embodiment, SB, CB, and 2BB are not provided.

On the other hand, the "winning and replay condition device" includes either a small winning combination or a replay in which the winning information is not carried over to the next game or later.
In the present embodiment, the winning and replay condition device numbers "0" to "30" are provided.
On the other hand, the "feature condition device" includes either RB, 1BB and 2BB in which the winning information can be carried over to the next game, and SB and CB in which the winning information is not carried over to the next game. In this embodiment, only 1BB (1BBA and 1BBB) that can carry over the winning information to the next game or later are provided.

When the winning information is won in the character condition device that includes any of the special roles that can be carried over to the next game or later, the winning information of the special role is until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role stops at the valid line. Will be carried over to the next game.
A game in which the winning information is not won in the character condition device including any of the special roles that can be carried over to the next game or later is referred to as "non-internal". On the other hand, when the winning character condition device is won, but the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning special role is not yet stopped at the effective line, that is, the game in which the winning information of the special role is carried over is "inside". That is. In the present embodiment, the game won by the bonus condition device is included in "non-internal", but the game won by the bonus condition device may be included in "internal".

The "advantageous operation mode" of the stop switch is an operation mode in which a winning combination with a large number of payouts wins in a game in which the game result (combination of symbols that stop at the effective line) is advantageous / disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch. Alternatively, it refers to an operation mode in which a winning combination that does not shift (promote) to an advantageous RT or shift (fall) to an unfavorable RT wins a prize. The "advantageous operation mode" is also referred to as a correct operation mode.

The "operation mode" is a concept that refers to the pressing order of the stop switch and / or the operation timing (the timing of pressing the stop switch for the target symbol to stop at the effective line).
Then, in the present embodiment, the "game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch" is a game at the time of winning the push order bell (small winning combination B group, small winning combination C group), and duplicate replays (replay B group, replay C group). ) Corresponds to the game at the time of winning.

Furthermore, when the push order bell is won, the number of bells (small winning combination) that wins when the stop switch is operated in the correct pressing order is the higher bell (out of the duplicate winning bell group (small winning combination), the number of payouts is It may be referred to as a bell (small role) in which it is most advantageous for the player to display the combination of the symbols such as the most small combination.
On the other hand, when the stop switch is operated in the wrong pressing order when the push order bell is won, the cheap bell may win a prize or the role may be missed depending on the operation timing of the stop switch. The stop rolls (combination of symbols on the effective line, also referred to as "spilled stitches") displayed when the winning combination is missed are referred to as "pattern symbols" in the present embodiment, and have pattern symbols 01 to 03.

On the other hand, when the replay is duplicated (winning of the replay B group and the replay C group), the combination of different symbols is stopped and displayed according to the order in which the stop switch is pressed, but when the replay is won, no omission occurs (“PB = 1” described later). ").
In this case, the push order for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols that is advantageous to the player, for example, the combination of symbols that shifts to the RT with a higher replay winning probability, or the combination of symbols that maintains the RT with a high replay winning probability is "correct answer". It is called "push order" or "promotion push order".
On the other hand, the push order in which the combination of symbols that shift from the RT that is advantageous to the player (for example, the RT with a high probability of winning a replay) to the RT that is unfavorable (for example, the RT with a low probability of winning a replay) is stopped and displayed is "incorrect". It is called "push order" or "fall (demotion) push order".

The "instruction function" means a function of displaying (notifying) the above-mentioned "advantageous operation mode" to the player.
In other words, the "instruction function" refers to a device that facilitates winning. On the other hand, when the "instruction function" is a device that facilitates the winning of small wins, the "instruction function" displays the correct answer pressing order for winning the correct answer pressing order (higher bell) when the pressing order bell is won. This does not include displaying the correct push order for winning a favorable replay (a replay for shifting to a favorable RT or a replay for maintaining a favorable RT) when a duplicate replay is won.

In the following embodiments, the "instruction function" refers to a function of displaying the "advantageous operation mode" to the player, and the "operation of the instruction function" indicates the correct answer pressing order when the pressing order bell is won. , And to display the correct answer push order to win a favorable replay at the time of duplicate replay winning.
It should be noted that showing the content of the "instruction" to the player is "display", and notifying the player of the content of the instruction is "notification". Therefore, the "instruction function" is both a "display function" and a "notification function".
Further, the "instruction" is a concept having the meaning of "instruction", but the player is not penalized for not following the "instruction". However, if the correct answer push order displayed by the operation of the instruction function is not followed, the higher bell may not win when the push order bell is won, or the unfavorable replay may win when the replay duplicate win is won.

Further, the "instruction function operating game" is a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (condition device having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (small combination B group, small combination C group, replay B group, replay C). In the game) won in the group), it means a game in which the instruction function is activated. Therefore, the instruction function operating game is one game. The instruction function operating game may also be referred to as a notification game. Further, even if the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, when the instruction function is not activated, the game is not an instruction function operation game.

In the present embodiment, the "game section" includes a "normal section", a "standby section", and an "advantageous section".
First, the "normal section" refers to a signal related to an instruction function, specifically, a push order instruction number and a winning and replay condition device number (information capable of determining the correct push order) described later, which are peripheral boards (for example, sub-control). It refers to a game section that is prohibited from being transmitted to the board) and that does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (does not activate the instruction function). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which the instruction function cannot be operated and a game section in which an advantageous operation mode cannot be displayed. However, in addition to the lottery of the conditional device (combination), it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (lottery, etc.).
In the normal section, since the instruction function must not be activated, it is not possible to display the push order instruction information on a predetermined display device (LED, etc.) electrically connected to the main control board, and the instruction function can be used. Since such a signal is not transmitted to the peripheral board, it is not possible to display (notify) an advantageous operation mode by an image display device electrically connected to the sub-control board described later.

The "normal section" of the present embodiment is a game section in which it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to an advantageous section (lottery, etc.). However, not limited to this, the first normal section (section where lottery is possible for the advantageous section) where it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (lottery, etc.) and the decision whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (lottery, etc.) It is also possible to provide a second normal section (advantageous section lottery impossible period) in which lottery etc. cannot be performed.
For example, when the transition condition to the second normal section is satisfied in the first normal section (for example, when a specific condition device is won), the transition to the second normal section can be mentioned. Alternatively, after the end of the special combination (for example, 1BB) operation (after the end of the special game), the transition to the second normal section may be made uniformly or under predetermined conditions.
In addition, the transition from the second normal section to the first normal section includes digestion of a predetermined number of games, winning of a predetermined condition device, display of a combination of predetermined symbols, and stay in a predetermined RT (for example, staying in a plurality of RTs). The condition is to shift to RT), which has the highest ratio.

Further, the "advantageous section" is a game section having performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated), and specifically, when the instruction function is activated, the instruction content on the main control board. It refers to a game section in which a signal related to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board only when the push order instruction information is displayed so that (advantageous operation mode) can be identified. In other words, the advantageous section is a game section in which the instruction function can be operated (the instruction function may be activated) and a game section in which the advantageous operation mode can be displayed (may be displayed). The game in the advantageous section may also be referred to as a noticeable game. On the contrary, the game in the normal section and the game in the waiting section may be referred to as a non-notifying game.
However, the sub control board cannot output an effect contrary to the instruction content given by the main control board or the signal related to the received instruction function.

Then, in the advantageous section of the present embodiment, the maximum payout number (“9”) corresponding to the specified number (“3”) in the game (when the accessory is not activated) in which the instruction function operating game can be executed can be obtained. In a game in which a conditional device (small winning combination B group) having an advantageous operating mode is won, at least one game is instructed to indicate the operating mode of the stop switch in which the winning combination (small winning combination 01) related to the maximum number of payouts is awarded. It is necessary.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the small combination B group and the small combination C group are provided as the so-called push order bell condition device.
In the small winning combination B group, when the pushing order is correct, the small winning combination 01, which is a 9-card winning combination, always wins, and when the pushing order is incorrect, a 1-card winning combination can be won (may be missed).
On the other hand, in the small winning combination C group, the small winning combination 02, which is a three-card combination, always wins when the pushing order is correct, and the one-card winning combination always wins when the pushing order is incorrect.

The game when the instruction function activated game is executed is when the accessory is not activated (normal game), and the specified number (the number of medals to be inserted) in this normal game is "3".
Further, when the specified number is "3", the maximum number of payouts is "9" (at the time of winning the small winning combination 01).
Therefore, in the advantageous section of the present embodiment, the correct answer pressing order for winning the small winning combination 01 is determined by activating the instruction function at the time of winning the condition device (small winning combination B group) in which the small winning combination 01 can be won. It is necessary to execute at least one game to be displayed.

Further, during the advantageous section, in the game in which the condition device having the advantageous operation mode is won, the instruction function may be always activated to display the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
On the other hand, even if the game is won by a condition device having an advantageous operation mode during the advantageous section, the instruction function may not be activated.

Furthermore, the "waiting section" refers to a game section when the transition to the advantageous section has not yet been made after the decision to shift to the advantageous section. The waiting section may or may not be provided. That is, the normal section may be shifted to the advantageous section, the normal section may be shifted to the standby section, and the standby section may be further shifted to the advantageous section. It is not possible to shift from the advantageous section to the standby section, and after the end of the advantageous section, it always shifts to the normal section. The waiting section can be shifted only when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device including the special combination that can be carried over to the next game or later, and corresponds to the special combination. A game in which a combination of symbols is displayed must be completed. Of course, the game may end before the game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is displayed.
Further, in the standby section, it is not possible to operate the instruction function on the main control board or transmit a signal related to the instruction function to the sub control board. When the instruction function is operated on the main control board and the signal related to the instruction function is transmitted to the sub control board, it is a condition that the section is in an advantageous section.

In the advantageous section of the present embodiment, there are cases where one instruction function operating game (excluding games won in the small winning combination C group, replay B group, and replay C group) is executed, and cases where a predetermined number of games are executed. Have.
In the advantageous section in which the game is executed a predetermined number of times, when the condition device having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is won, the instruction function is basically activated.
The end condition of the advantageous section is not to determine the number of games described above, but for example, to perform an end (puncture) lottery at a predetermined timing, and to end the advantageous section when the lottery is won. You may.

Alternatively, the execution condition of the instruction function operating game is not satisfied only by shifting to the advantageous section, and whether or not to execute the instruction function operating game is determined by lottery or the like on the condition that the instruction function operating game is in the advantageous section. When it is decided to execute the instruction function operation game, the instruction function operation game may be executed until a predetermined end condition is satisfied.
In addition, during the advantageous section, it is determined (lottery, etc.) whether or not to add (add) the number of (remaining) games in the advantageous section.
In addition, the maximum number of games is set for the advantageous section, and when the maximum number of games is reached, the advantageous section is always terminated at that point even if the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is reached (limiter). Operation), shift to the normal section.

Further, when the maximum number of games is reached, even if the condition device (small winning combination B group) having an advantageous operation mode capable of obtaining the maximum number of payouts (“9”) has never been won, or the winning is won. However, even if the winning combination (small combination 01) related to the maximum number of payouts has never instructed the operation mode of the stop switch, the advantageous section is always ended at that point (limiter operation), and it is normal. Move to the section.

In the following embodiments, detailed description of AT (instruction function operating section, notification game section) will be omitted. The AT is a game section in which the instruction function is always activated or the instruction function is activated more frequently when the condition device having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is won.
The relationship between the advantageous section and AT can be set arbitrarily. However, it is necessary to be in the advantageous section during AT. For example, it may be set to "advantageous section = AT". In this case, the AT is continued throughout the advantageous section.
Further, the non-AT and the AT may be repeated (execution of at least one AT) during the advantageous section.

Furthermore, the advantageous section is set as a chance zone (CZ), and AT is executed when the AT execution condition is satisfied during the advantageous section (CZ), but AT is executed when the AT execution condition is not satisfied. It is also possible to end the advantageous section without. However, as described above, when the section shifts to the advantageous section, the condition device (small combination B group) having an advantageous operation mode capable of obtaining the maximum number of payouts (“9” in the following embodiment) at least once is used. It is necessary to activate the instruction function when winning. However, if the player does not win the small winning combination B group even once within the predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games), which is the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section, the instruction function is not activated even once in the advantageous section. May be terminated.

The pull-in rate (PB) is the probability that the desired symbol to be stopped on the effective line can be stopped on the effective line from the moment the stop switch is operated until the reel stops (maximum number of moving frames). Shown.
Then, if the stop switch is not operated at an appropriate reel position (at an operation timing at which the target symbol can be stopped at the effective line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol is stopped at the effective line (up to the effective line). The inability to pull in) is referred to as "PB (pull-in rate) ≠ 1".
On the other hand, "PB" indicates that the target symbol can always be stopped (pulled in) to the effective line regardless of the position of the reel at the moment when the stop switch is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch). = 1 ".

Then, "PB = 1" has a case where all reels are so and a case where only a specific (some) reel is so for the combination.
In the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames is set to "4", and when the target symbols are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or less, "PB = 1" and exceeds 5 symbols (6 symbols or more). When arranged at intervals, "PB ≠ 1". In particular, the number of symbols on the reels of the present embodiment is set to "20", and if four symbols are arranged at intervals of five symbols, the symbols are "PB = 1".

When the game progresses with "N-1" game, "N" game, "N + 1" game, ... ("N" is an integer of 2 or more), the current game is "N" game. When it is an eye, the game of the "N" game is referred to as "this time game". Further, the game of the "N-1" game is referred to as a "previous game".
On the other hand, the game of the "N + 1" game is referred to as the "next game".

The "ball payout rate" is a value calculated by the expected number of medals to be paid out / the number of medals to be inserted. When it is "1", the status quo is maintained, and when it exceeds "1", the number of medals increases. It is a state, and when it is less than "1", the number of medals is reduced.
Further, the "expected value of the number of medals to be paid out" is calculated by the sum of "probability of winning the winning number x number of payouts" for all the winning combinations to be drawn in the game.

Furthermore, the "difference number" is a value calculated by "the number of medals paid out (the number of medals actually paid out or the expected value of the number of medals paid out) -the number of medals inserted". When the number of medals inserted is "3", if the number of medals paid out (expected value) is "3", the difference number is "± 0", and if the number of medals paid out (expected value) exceeds "3", When the difference number exceeds "0" and the medal payout number (expected value) is less than "3", the difference number is less than "0".

"Bet" means betting a medal (game medium) in order to play a game. In the present embodiment, the number of bets (specified number) that can be played is set to 3 when the accessory is not operating (during a normal game). On the other hand, while the accessory (1BB) is operating, the number of bets (specified number) that can be played is set to two. To bet a medal, the actual medal is groomed and inserted from the medal slot, or the bet switch is operated to bet the stored medal.
On the other hand, "storage" means crediting medals inside the slot machine 10, unlike the above-mentioned "bet". The term "storage" may be used to include a bet, but in the present specification, the term "storage" is used to mean not to include a "bet". In the present embodiment, the maximum (limit) number of cards that can be stored is set to "50" regardless of the gaming state or the like.

“Maintenance” means that the player directly inserts medals from the medal insertion slot 43, which will be described later.
The “care bet” means that the player bets a medal by caring for the medal from the medal slot 43.
“Maintenance storage” means that the player stores medals (adds credits) by caring for medals from the medal insertion slot 43.
"Bet medal" means a medal that has been bet.
"Reservoir medal" means a medal stored as a credit.

The "storage bet" is to allow the player to operate a bet switch 40, which will be described later, to play a game with a part or all of the medals stored as credits within the range in which the player can bet in the game. It means to bet.
The "automatic bet" means that when the replay wins, the number of medals bet in the previous game is automatically bet by the control process of the slot machine 10. The above-mentioned maintenance bet medals, storage bet medals, and storage medals can be settled afterwards, but the medals automatically bet due to the winning of the replay cannot be settled.
"Injection" means betting or storing medals, including the above-mentioned care bets, care storage, storage bets, and automatic bets.
"Payment" means paying out bet medals and / or stored medals to the player.

"Payout" means paying out medals to the player based on the winning of the role, or paying out the medals by the above settlement. When a medal is paid out to a player based on a winning combination, it includes both storing it as a credit and paying out the actual medal from the payout slot (not shown). In the payout in the present embodiment, "50" medals are stored in the credit as the limit number, and the medals for which the number of stored medals exceeds "50" are controlled to be actually paid out to the player.

It should be noted that the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment "paying out" a medal to the player is equivalent to the player "acquiring" the medal. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the slot machine 10, it is "payout of medals", and from the viewpoint of the player, it is "acquisition of medals". Therefore, for example, there are cases where it is referred to as "payout (number)" and cases where it is referred to as "acquisition (number)", both of which have the same meaning.
Further, the "game medium" is a medal in the present embodiment, but in the case of, for example, an enclosed game machine, electronic information is used as the game medium. The "electronic information" means, for example, that when money (banknotes) is inserted into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and a part or all of the electronic information is played on the game machine. It can be stored in a game machine as a game medium for performing the above.

In the MPU (1 chip microprocessor) of the present embodiment, A, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers (7 registers) can be used at the time of calculation.
Further, an F (flag) register is provided as one of the registers (A register, H register, etc.) used in the present embodiment. The F register, like the other registers, is composed of D0 to D7 bits. A carry flag is assigned to the D0 bit, and a zero flag is assigned to the D6 bit.
The "carry flag" executes arithmetic processing (for example, addition processing, subtraction processing, logical product operation processing, logical sum operation processing, exclusive OR operation, etc., the same applies hereinafter), and the result of the operation causes overflow or carry. When it occurs, it becomes "1". On the other hand, when the calculation process is executed and no digit overflow or carry occurs due to the calculation result, the value becomes "0".
Further, the "zero flag" becomes "1" when the calculation process is executed and the calculation result becomes "0". On the other hand, when the arithmetic processing is executed and the arithmetic result is not "0", it becomes "0".

In the present specification, a numerical value having a "B" at the end (particularly, 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, a number with an "H" at the end means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating "16" in a decimal number is expressed as "00010000 (B)" in a binary number and "10 (H)" in a hexadecimal number. Further, a numerical value meaning a decimal number is expressed as "16 (D)" as necessary.
However, when it is clear which of the binary number, the decimal number, and the hexadecimal number is, the suffixes of "B", "D", and "H" may be omitted, respectively.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings and the like.
<First Embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine 10 in the present embodiment.
As a typical control board provided in the slot machine 10, a main control board 50 and a sub control board 80 are provided.
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like (it does not mean that only those shown in FIG. 1 are provided).

In FIG. 1, the main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progress including operation switches such as a bet switch 40 are an input port 51 (input ports 0 to 2 described later) or an output port 52 (output port described later). It is electrically connected via (0 to 7 etc.). The input port 51 is a connection unit to which a signal such as an operation switch is input, and the output port 52 is a connection unit for transmitting a signal to a peripheral device such as a motor 32.
In FIG. 1, the input peripheral device is indicated by an arrow pointing from the main control board 50 to the peripheral device, and the output peripheral device is indicated by an arrow pointing from the main control board 50 to the peripheral device. It is shown (the same applies to the sub control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of a game or the like. Data (total number of games, etc.) necessary for displaying the management information described later is stored in the RWM 53.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, a data table) necessary for the progress of the game.

The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU provided on the main control board 50, executes a program necessary for the progress of the game, performs calculations, and the like. To pay out, etc.
The main CPU 55 has a built-in register. In particular, in the present embodiment, a plurality of registers (for example, A register to L register, transmission register, etc.) are provided.

Further, on the main control board 50, an MPU including an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and a register is mounted. The RWM 53 and ROM 54 may be provided externally in addition to those mounted inside the MPU.
An MPU including an RWM83, a ROM84, and a subCPU85 is mounted on the sub-control board 80 described later. The RWM83 and ROM84 may be provided externally in addition to those mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 are sent to the inside of the medal selector.
As shown in FIG. 1, the medal selector includes a passage sensor 43a, a blocker 45, and a closing sensor 44 (but is not limited thereto), and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
When a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 43, it is first detected by the passage sensor 43a.

Further, a blocker 45 is provided on the downstream side of the passage sensor 43a. The blocker 45 is for permitting / disallowing the insertion of medals, and when the insertion of medals is not permitted, the blocker 45 forms a medal passage for returning the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 from the payout slot. To do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is permitted, a medal passage for guiding the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 to the hopper 35 is formed.

Here, the blocker 45 is in a state of disallowing the insertion of medals during the game (from the start of rotation of the reels 31 to the end of the payout corresponding to the winning combination when all the reels 31 are stopped and the winning combination is won). To do. That is, the blocker 45 permits the insertion of medals at least when the game is not performed.

An input sensor (optical sensor) 44 is provided further downstream of the blocker 45. In the present embodiment, the throwing sensor 44 is composed of a pair of throwing sensors 44a and 44b arranged at a predetermined distance from each other, and the other throwing sensor 44b has passed a predetermined time after the medal is detected by one throwing sensor 44a. It is configured to be detected by. Then, based on the timing at which the pair of insertion sensors 44 are turned on / off, it is determined whether or not the correct medal has been inserted.
In the following, when referring to the entire input sensor 44, it is referred to as "input sensor 44". Further, in a flowchart or the like described later, the closing sensor 44a may be abbreviated as "turning sensor 1" and the closing sensor 44b may be abbreviated as "turning sensor 2".

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, on the main control board 50, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and a settlement switch 46 are electrically operated as operation switches operated by the player. Is connected.
The bet switch 40 (40a or 40b) is a switch operated by the player when betting the stored medals for the game this time. In the present embodiment, a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three (maximum number or a specified number) medals are provided.
Not limited to this, a bet switch for two bets may be provided.

Further, the specified number of the present embodiment is set to 3 when the accessory is not activated and 2 when the accessory is activated, but when the 1-bet switch 40a is operated (pressed) twice, 2 medals are used. Can be inserted, and three medals can be inserted by operating (pressing) three times. Further, while the accessory is operating, two medals (specified number) can be inserted at one time by operating the 3-bet switch 40b.

Further, the start switch 41 is a switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of the left, middle, and right).
Furthermore, the stop switch 42 is a switch provided by three corresponding reels 31 (left, middle, right) and operated by the player when the corresponding reels 31 are stopped.
Further, the checkout switch 46 is a switch operated by the player when refunding (paying out) medals bet and / or stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display board 75 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. In reality, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected to each other. In No. 1, the illustration of the relay board is omitted. As described above, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed between them.
Further, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected by a harness or the like, and may be connected via another board (relay board or the like). For example, one or more other separate boards (relay board, etc.) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80.

The display board 75 is equipped with a storage number display LED 76, an acquisition number display LED 78, and a status display LED 79. These LEDs 76, 78, and 79 are provided in the vicinity of the operation switch operated by the player, and are provided at positions that the player can always see. It is not necessary to provide LEDs 76, 78, and 79 on one display board 75. For example, a plurality of display boards 75 such as the display boards 75A and 75B are provided, and any of the display boards 75 is provided. LEDs 76, 78, and 79 of the above may be provided.
Details of the stored number display LED76, the acquired number display LED78, and the status display LED79 will be described later (FIG. 16).

In FIG. 1, a motor 32 or the like of a symbol display device is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
The symbol display device includes a reel 31 for displaying a symbol (three in this embodiment), a motor 32 for driving each reel 31, and a reel sensor 33 for detecting the position of the reel 31.

The motor 32 is for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, and is controlled by the reel control means 65 described later. Here, the reel 31 is composed of a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and the stop switch 42 operated when the left reel 31 is stopped is the left stop switch 42, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 has a ring shape, and a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (designs constituting a combination of symbols corresponding to the combinations) are printed is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof. The specific arrangement of the symbols on the reel 31 will be described later.
Further, each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) indexes. The index is provided on the peripheral side surface of the reel 31, for example, in a convex shape, and is used when detecting whether or not the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether or not it has made one rotation, and the like. Then, each index is detected by the reel sensor 33. The signal of the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Then, when the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

Further, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. As a result, it is possible to detect the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected.

Further, a medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when the medals of the hopper 35 are paid out from the payout port, and a payout for detecting medals paid out from the hopper motor 36. A sensor 37 is provided.

The medals that have been cared for and received from the medal slot 43 are formed so as to be housed in the hopper 35 through a predetermined passage (also referred to as a “shoot portion”).
In the present embodiment, the payout sensor (optical sensor) 37 includes a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b arranged at a predetermined distance, and after a predetermined time has elapsed after the medal is detected by one payout sensor 37a. It is configured to be detected by the other payout sensor 37b. Then, based on the timing at which the pair of payout sensors 37 are turned on / off, it is determined whether or not the medals are correctly paid out.
In the following, when referring to the entire payout sensor 37, it is referred to as “payout sensor 37”. Further, in a flowchart or the like described later, the payout sensor 37a may be abbreviated as "payout sensor 1" and the payout sensor 37b may be abbreviated as "payout sensor 2".

For example, when the signals of the payout sensors 37a and 37b are both off even though the hopper motor 36 is driven, it is determined that the medal has not been paid out, and a hopper error (no medal) is detected. Will be done.
On the other hand, when at least one of the signals of the payout sensor 37 remains ON, it is detected that the medal is jammed.

Further, the power switch 11 is a switch for turning on / off the power of the slot machine 10.
The setting key switch 12 is a switch that is turned on when the setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion slot and is rotated 90 degrees to the right (clockwise), and is turned on when the setting is confirmed or the setting is changed.

The setting switch 13 is a switch that is operated when the set value is changed. For example, the set value is added by "1" each time the setting is changed. In this embodiment, the set value has settings 1 to 6, and during the setting change, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, the set value changes from "1" → "2" → ... → "6" → It switches from "1" to ... One of the set values is displayed during the setting change, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the displayed set value is confirmed.

Further, when the power switch 11 is turned on while the reset switch 14 is turned on, the reset, that is, the initialization process is performed, and the predetermined data stored in the RWM 53 is cleared.
Further, the door switch 15 is a switch that is turned on when the front door (not shown) of the slot machine 10 is opened, and is for detecting the open / closed state of the front door.

Furthermore, an external signal (outer end signal) to the external centralized terminal plate 100 is output from a part of the output port 52 (output port 4 in FIG. 20 described later).
Here, the "external signal" is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (such as a hall computer 200 or a data counter installed in a hall) via the external centralized terminal plate 100. In the present embodiment, as external signals, a signal related to AT (advantageous section) or special game, a signal indicating an error generated in the slot machine 10 or a recovery from a power failure (power is turned on), a slot machine, etc. A signal indicating the opening of the front door of 10, a medal bet signal, a medal payout signal, and the like are provided.

In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection, output, and the like of the effect (information) during the game and the game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71 described later) is unidirectionally connected to the sub control board 80 by parallel communication. Send the information (control command) required for the output of the production.
The main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, and may be connected by using an optical communication means. Further, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, and serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

Like the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
The following peripheral devices for effect such as the effect lamp 21 as shown in FIG. 1 are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 via the input port 81 or the output port 82. However, the peripheral devices for production are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data or the like captured when the sub CPU 85 controls the effect.
Further, the ROM 84 is a storage medium for storing various data and the like when a lottery related to the production is performed as the production data.

The effect lamp 21 is composed of, for example, an LED or the like, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect lamp 21 is lit in a predetermined pattern. The effect lamp 21 is a back lamp and reel 31 that are arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31 and illuminate the symbols displayed on the reel 31 (three consecutive symbols that can be seen from the display window 17) from behind. A fluorescent lamp that illuminates the design on the reel 31 from the upper part of the reel 31, a frame lamp that is arranged in front of the front door of the slot machine 10 and blinks when a winning combination is won, and the like are included.

Further, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and various effect images (correct answer pressing order, effects corresponding to the lottery result of the condition device, etc.) during the game, and It displays game information (the number of games played, the number of acquired cards, etc., when the accessory is activated or in an advantageous section).
Further, the cross key 24 and the menu button 25 are used when displaying information intended by the player (including a two-dimensional code which is the player's game history), or when the hall manager (store manager, etc.) changes various settings. It is used when doing so.

Subsequently, the roles of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols, and the like will be described.
FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in this embodiment. In FIG. 2, the symbol numbers are also shown. For example, in the left reel 31, the symbol number 0 is "bell A".
As shown in FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, each reel 31 is equally divided into 20 frames, and a predetermined symbol is displayed on each frame.
In the figure, "blank" does not mean that the symbol is not displayed at all, and a predetermined symbol corresponding to the "blank" is displayed.
The "bell A", "bell B", and "bell C" are symbols having similar appearances, but different symbols.

Further, FIG. 3A shows the positional relationship between the display window (transparent window) 17 provided on the front door (front door, not shown) of the slot machine 10, the reels 31, and the effective line (design). It is a figure which shows (a display line which displays a combination).
In this embodiment, three reels 31 are provided in parallel in the horizontal direction (left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31). Further, each reel 31 is arranged so that three consecutive symbols can be seen from the display window 17. Therefore, a total of nine symbols (frames) are arranged so as to be visible from the display window 17 of the slot machine 10. The number at the bottom right of each symbol indicates the symbol number.

Further, FIG. 3B illustrates the designation of the symbol position in the present specification. In the present specification, the symbol positions at the time of stop that can be seen from the display window 17 for each reel 31 are referred to as "upper", "middle", and "lower" in order from the top, and if it is the left reel 31, each is "upper left". , "Left middle row", "Left lower row".
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 3A, effective lines are set for the nine symbols that can be seen from the display window 17.

Here, the "effective line" is a symbol combination line (display line) that is an arrangement line of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped and forms a combination of symbols, and is a symbol corresponding to any combination. When the combination stops at that line, it is the line that wins the role. In this embodiment, one valid line (a straight line passing through "lower left"-"middle middle"-"upper right") is defined, and all other symbol combination lines are invalid lines. There is.

The invalid line is a line that is not set as a valid line among the symbol combination lines, and even if the combination of symbols corresponding to any combination stops at that line, the profit is given according to the combination. This is a line that does not pay out medals. That is, the invalid line is a line that is not the target of establishing the combination of symbols in the first place.

Further, conventionally, slot machines in which the number of effective lines differs depending on the number of medals inserted have been known. For example, when the number of medals inserted is 1, the number of effective lines is 1, when the number of medals inserted is 2, the number of effective lines is set to 3, and when the number of medals inserted is 3, the number of effective lines is set to 5. And so on. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, three or two medals are inserted to play the game, and in all the games, one line shown in FIG. 3 (A) becomes an effective line. There is no change in the number of effective lines depending on the number of medals inserted. Therefore, in the present specification, the term "effective line" refers to the line shown in FIG. 3 (A).

4 to 9 are diagrams showing the types of combinations (combinations included in the condition device drawn by the combination lottery means 61 described later), the number of payouts, and the combination of symbols in the present embodiment. In addition, although it is not a combination, FIG. 9 shows pattern symbols 01 to 03 as a combination of symbols displayed when the winning combination is missed when a specific condition device is won (numbers "101" to "101" to "120").

The roles of the present embodiment are roughly classified into a special role, a replay (replaying role), and a small role.
Then, the combination of symbols corresponding to each combination and the number of payouts at the time of winning are determined. When all reels 31 are stopped, if the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations is stopped at the effective line (the winning combination is won, the same applies hereinafter), the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out.
However, the number of payouts at the time of winning a special role is set to 0. In the replay, medals are automatically inserted (replay).

In FIGS. 4 to 9, the "specified number 3" displayed on the number of payouts and the like indicates the number of payouts and the like when the specified number is 3 (when the accessory is not operating, that is, the number of inserts during the normal game). , "Specified number 2" indicates the number of payouts when the specified number is 2 (when the accessory is activated, that is, the number of inserted cards during the special game). For example, the replay 01 of the number "3" indicates that the replay is performed with the specified number of three cards, and the "-" of the specified number of two cards indicates that the lottery is not performed.

In FIG. 4, the numbers "1" and "2" correspond to special roles (roles). In the present embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special role, and 1BB has two types (1BBA and 1BBB).
The special role is a role that shifts from a normal game to a special game.
If you win 1BB, you will not be paid out medals in this game, but from the next game, you will shift to the 1BB game, which is equivalent to a special game (operation of the character).
During the 1BB game (when the character is activated), the ball output rate is set to exceed "1", so that medals can be expected to be obtained more than when the character is not activated, which is an advantageous game for the player. ..

In addition, the replay (replay role) is a role that enables the replay to maintain the number of medals inserted in this game (automatically bet the medals). For example, if the replay wins when the specified number of games is "3" this time and the specified number of next games is "2", the number of medals inserted in this game is not maintained and the next time. The specified number of games, "2", may be automatically bet.
As shown in FIG. 4, the replay of the present embodiment includes replays 01 to 06 (numbers "3" to "13").
Replays 02 and 03 are replays that, if a prize is won in a specific RT, will be transferred to another RT. Therefore, these replays are also referred to as transitional replays.

More specifically, when the replay 02 wins in RT2, the game shifts to RT3 (RT advantageous to the player) from the next game. Therefore, the replay 02 is also referred to as a promotion replay.
Further, when the replay 03 wins in RT3, the game shifts to RT2 (RT which is more disadvantageous to the player than the previous RT) from the next game. Therefore, the replay 03 is also referred to as a fall (demotion) replay.

Further, the replays 04 and 05 are firstly used as control replays for the purpose of increasing the types of condition devices by winning a plurality of replays in duplicate. Replay A replay included in B2, B3, C2, C3, or E. When the replays B2, B3, C2, or C3 are won, the replay 04 or 05 as the control replay does not stop at the effective line.

Further, the replays 04 and 05 are secondly used as a rare replay and are included in the replay E of the condition device described later. When Replay E is won during the advantageous section, the addition of the advantageous section is executed. It should be noted that the addition may not always be executed, but the addition lottery may be performed.
Further, the replay 06 is a replay drawn by lottery during the operation of 1BB, and is included in the replay D of the condition device described later. When Replay D is won during the advantageous section, the addition of the advantageous section is executed. It should be noted that the addition may not always be executed, but the addition lottery may be performed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 to 8, the small combination includes small combinations 01 to 40 (numbers “14” to “100”). Small wins 01 and 02 are small wins (small wins corresponding to higher bells) that win a prize in the correct push order when the push order bell is won, which will be described later. In addition, the small wins 03 to 34 are small wins (small wins corresponding to the cheap bells) that can be won (PB ≠ 1) in the incorrect push order when the push order bell is won.
Furthermore, the small wins 35 to 38 are rare small wins (small wins corresponding to watermelons or cherries).
Further, the small winning combinations 39 and 40 are small winning combinations that can be won only when the specified number is two, that is, when the accessory is operated.

As described above, the pattern symbols 01 to 03 are not the winning combination itself, but appear when the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) when the pressing order is incorrect when the push order bell is won. It is a combination of symbols. Further, the pattern symbol is a symbol that shifts RT (shifts to RT2 in this embodiment) when the combination of the symbols stops at the effective line at a specific RT (non-RT, RT1, or RT3 in this embodiment). It is a combination. In the present embodiment, the pattern symbols 01 to 03 are made to appear without fail when the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) when the push order is incorrect when the small combination B group is won. However, other combinations of symbols (not the combination itself) may appear.

In each of the above-mentioned combinations, if the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination does not stop at the effective line in the winning game, the combination that is carried over to the next game and the combination that is not carried over is defined. ..
The carry-over role is 1BB in this embodiment. When 1BB is won, the winning information of the 1BB is controlled to be carried over to the next game or later in the game until the 1BB wins.

On the other hand, the winning of 1BB is carried over, while the small roles and replays other than 1BB are not carried over. When a small winning combination or replay is won in the lottery of the conditional device, the winning combination is valid only in this game, and the winning is not carried over to the next game or later. That is, in the game in which these winning combinations are won, the reel 31 is stopped and controlled so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning winning combination can be won, but at the end of the game regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won. , The right to the winning combination will be extinguished.

When starting the game, the player inserts the medals stored in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (storage bet), or takes care of the medals from the medal insertion slot 43 (care bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with a specified number of medals bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) receives this signal, the combination lottery means 61 draws a combination, and all the motors 32 are driven and controlled to drive and control all the reels. It is controlled to rotate 31. By rotating the reel 31 by the motor 32 in this way, the symbol on the reel 31 is moved and displayed in the vertical direction in the display window 17 at a predetermined speed.

Then, by pressing the stop switch 42, the player stops the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) receives this signal, it drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 to correspond to the winning combination lottery result of the winning combination lottery means 61. The stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed so as to be performed.

Then, the game result of this game is displayed by the combination of the symbols when all the reels 31 are stopped. Further, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations stops at the valid line (when the winning combination is won), the medals corresponding to the winning winning combination are paid out.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following combination lottery means 61 and the like. The following means in the present embodiment are examples, and are not limited to the means shown in the present embodiment.

The combination lottery means 61 draws (determines, selects) a condition device (winning combination). Therefore, the winning combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, and the like.
Further, "winning of the condition device" is also referred to as a winning combination lottery result, a lottery result, a winning number, a winning result, and the like.

The combination lottery means 61 is based on, for example, a random number generating means (hardware random number or the like) for lottery, a random number extracting means for extracting random numbers generated by the random number generating means, and a random number value extracted by the random number extracting means. It is provided with a determination means for determining whether or not the condition device has been won and the winning condition device.

The random number generation means generates random numbers in a predetermined region (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal numbers). The random number is, for example, a random number that the counter that counts 1 in 200 n (nano) sec keeps counting in the range of "0" to "65535" as one cycle, and is a random number while the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on. Keep counting.

The random number extraction means extracts the random numbers generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (on) by the player. The determination means determines the condition device corresponding to the region to which the random number value belongs by collating the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means with the condition device lottery table described later. For example, if the extracted random number value belongs to the area of the winning and replay condition device number "1" (replay A), it is determined that the replay A is won.

10 to 13 are diagrams showing the types of condition devices drawn by the combination lottery means 61 and the contents of the winning combination included in each condition device.
In the following description, the condition device will be mainly described, and the details of the stop control of the reel 31 based on the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing at the time of winning each condition device will be described in the reel control means 65. To do.

As described above, the condition device of the present embodiment is a "character condition device" which is a condition device including any of the special roles that can carry over the winning information to the next game, and the winning information is not carried over to the next game. It consists of a "winning and replay condition device" which is a condition device including either a small win or a replay.
Winning of the accessory condition device corresponds to winning of 1BB in this embodiment.
The character condition device number "0" corresponds to the non-winning of the special role, the character condition device number "1" corresponds to the winning of 1 BBA, and the character condition device number "2" corresponds to the winning of 1 BBB. Equivalent to.

Further, for example, when the replay A is won, the accessory condition device number is "0", and the winning and replay condition device numbers are "1".
On the other hand, when 1BBA is won alone, the accessory condition device number is "1", and the winning and replay condition device number is "0".

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there is a case where 1BB and the small winning combination are duplicated. For example, when 1BBA and the small winning combination D are duplicated, the accessory condition device number is "1", and the winning and replay condition device number. Is "26".
If 1BB and a small win or replay are won in duplicate, the prize for the small win or replay is prioritized in this game (the priority can be set arbitrarily). In addition, since the winning of a small role or replay is valid only in this game, the winning is not carried over to the next game, but the winning information of 1BB is carried over to the next game unless a prize is won.

Hereinafter, the winning and replay condition devices will be described.
The condition device number "0" corresponds to a non-winning combination (so-called loss).
Further, the replay A of the condition device number "1" is a single winning of the replay 01. When Replay A is won, Replay 01 wins regardless of the push order (in any push order).

Replays B1 to B3 of condition device numbers "2" to "4" (hereinafter collectively referred to as "replay B group"), replays C1 to C3 of condition device numbers "5" to "7" (hereinafter collectively referred to as "replay B group"). Each of the above (referred to as "replay C group") is a duplicate winning of a plurality of types of replays, and is a duplicate winning including at least one of the replays 01 or 02. Then, the type of replay to be won is set to be different according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42.
For example, in the replay B1 of the condition device number "2", the replay 02 wins in the push order of the left first stop, and the replay 01 wins in the case other than the left first stop (middle or right first stop).

In the case of duplicate replay winning, the replay (replaying role) wins regardless of the push order, so there is no concept of high / low medals. However, for example, when the replay B1 is won in RT2, the RT is promoted (shifted from RT2 to RT3) by winning the replay 02 in the first left stop. On the other hand, except for the first stop on the left, RT2 is maintained by winning the replay 01.
Further, when the replay C1 is won in the RT3, the RT3 is maintained by winning the replay 01 at the first left stop. On the other hand, except for the first stop on the left, RT is dropped (demoted) (shifted from RT3 to RT2) by winning Replay 03.

The replay D of the condition device number "8" is a single win of the replay 06. When Replay D is won, Replay 06 wins regardless of the push order.
Similarly, the replay E of the condition device number "9" is a duplicate winning of the replays 04 and 05. When Replay E is won, Replay 04 or 05 wins regardless of the push order. These replays 04 and 05 have a role as rare replays. In particular, in the present embodiment, if a lottery is drawn at RT1 and Replay E is won during RT1 and the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. It should be noted that the addition may not always be executed, but the addition lottery may be performed.

In FIG. 11, the small winning combination A of the condition device number “10” is attached to a so-called common bell, and the small winning combination 01 is independently elected. Then, when the small winning combination A is won, the small winning combination 01 always wins regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed (PB = 1).
Further, in FIGS. 11 to 12, the small combinations B1 to B12 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "small combination B group") of the condition device numbers "11" to "22" correspond to so-called push order bells. , Small win 01 (9 bells, 9 wins) and at least one of small wins 03-34 (1 win).

When these conditional devices are won, a small winning combination 01, which is a high bell (9 bells, 9 winning combination), is awarded with "PB = 1" in the correct pressing order according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42. On the other hand, when the order is incorrect, the small winning combination 03, which is a cheap bell (single combination), depends on the operation timing of the stop switch 42 (the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated). There are cases where ~ 34 wins a prize and cases where none of the small wins wins (when a pattern symbol is displayed due to omission).

In FIG. 13, the small combinations C1 to C3 (hereinafter collectively referred to as “small combination C group”) of the condition device numbers “23” to “25” are so-called pushes, as in the above small combination B group. It corresponds to a forward bell, and is a duplicate winning including a small winning combination 02 (3 bells, 3 playing cards) and a small winning combination 03-10 (1 card winning combination).
When these conditional devices are won, a small winning combination 02, which is a high bell (3 bells, 3 bindings), wins a prize according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 with "PB = 1" when the correct answer is pressed. On the other hand, in the case of incorrect answering order, "PB = 1" and one of the small winning combinations 03 to 10 which is a cheap bell (one-card winning combination) wins a prize. Therefore, when the small winning combination C group is won, unlike when the small winning combination B group is won, there is no case where the pattern symbol is displayed (missing). Not limited to this, there may be a case where none of the small wins is won.

When the small role B group is won, 9 cards will be paid out when the high bell is won, so when the push order is correct, 3 cards will be put in and 9 cards will be paid out. The number of sheets is "+6". Therefore, the condition device is such that the number of medals increases when the push order is correct, and the number of medals decreases when the push order is incorrect (the number of payouts is 1 or 0).
On the other hand, in the small role C group, 3 cards will be paid out when the high bell is won, so when the push order is correct, 3 cards will be paid out (number of input) and 3 cards will be paid out (number of payouts). The difference in the number of sheets is "± 0 sheets". Therefore, when the push order is correct, the number of medals is maintained as it is, and when the push order is incorrect (the number of payouts is one), the number of medals is reduced.

It should be noted that the reason why both the push order bells for paying out 9 pieces and the push order bells for paying out 3 pieces in the correct push order are provided in order to adjust the payout rate. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the probability that one winning combination will be won is 25% when the push order is incorrect when the small winning combination B is won, and the other 75% is a pattern symbol. Is set to be displayed (no payout when the pattern pattern is displayed). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13, when the push order is incorrect when the small winning combination C group is won, one winning combination is won with "PB = 1". In this way, by providing two types of push order bells with different numbers of payouts depending on whether the answer is correct or incorrect, and setting the winning probability appropriately, the payout rate can be set in an appropriate range. become.

The small winning combination D of the condition device number "26" corresponds to a rare small winning combination (watermelon). The small winning combination D is a single winning of the small winning combination 35, and is set to "PB ≠ 1".
Further, the small winning combination E1 of the condition device number "27" and the small winning combination E2 of the conditional device number "28" correspond to the rare small winning combination (cherry) as in the above small winning combination D1. The small winning combination E1 is a duplicate winning of the small winning combination 36 and 38, and the small winning combination E2 is a duplicate winning combination including the small winning combination 37 in addition to the above small winning combination 36 and 38. When the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, two winning combinations (small winning combination 36 or 38) will be won regardless of the push order.

The small winning combination F of the condition device number "29" is a winning combination that is drawn only during 1BB operation (during 1BB game), and is a duplicate winning of small winning combination 01 to 39. When the small role F is won, the small role 39, which is a 10-card role, wins with "PB = 1".
The small winning combination G of the condition device number "30" is a winning combination that is drawn only during 1BB operation (during 1BB game), and is a single winning of the small winning combination 40. When the small role G is won, the small role 40, which is a 9-card role, wins with "PB = 1".

14 and 15 are winning probabilities determined by the lottery table when the condition device is drawn by the combination lottery means 61, and show the number of the accessory condition devices and the winning and replay condition devices for each RT. It is a figure. Dividing the numerical values shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 by "65536" gives the winning probability. For example, the number of units for which 1 BBA is independently won is set to "20" and "10" ("30" in total) in both non-RT and RT1 to RT3. Therefore, the single winning probability of 1BBA is "30/65536".

FIG. 14 is a table of number of condition devices that are common in settings and that can be determined to shift to an advantageous section, or that an additional advantageous section can be added (or an additional lottery can be performed).
Here, "common setting" means that there is no setting difference, that is, the setting 1 to the setting 6 have the same numerical value.
Then, when the condition device common to the settings is won, it may always be decided to shift to the advantageous section (decision to add during the advantageous section), or whether or not to shift to the advantageous section ( Whether or not to add during the advantageous section) may be decided by lottery. Alternatively, a conditional device that decides to shift to the advantageous section (decides to add during the advantageous section) and a conditional device that decides not to shift to the advantageous section (decides not to add during the advantageous section). It may be provided.

In the present embodiment, the condition device common to the settings shown in FIG. 14 is provided with a condition device that determines to shift to the advantageous section and a condition device that determines not to shift to the advantageous section. Further, during the advantageous section, the condition device is always set to determine to add the advantageous section.
In FIG. 14, in the normal section, "◯" means that it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and "x" means that it is decided not to shift to the advantageous section. Further, in the advantageous section, "Δ" means that the advantageous section is decided to be added, and "x" means that the advantageous section is not added.
In FIG. 14, "○" determines to shift to the advantageous section, and "Δ" determines to add the advantageous section, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "○" indicates It may mean that a lottery is performed whether or not to shift to an advantageous section, and “Δ” may mean a lottery whether or not to add an advantageous section.

Further, FIG. 15 shows a conditional device and a number thereof that are not determined to shift to the advantageous section and are not determined to add the advantageous section.
In the present embodiment, the condition device that decides to shift to the advantageous section or decides to add the advantageous section is limited to the time when the condition device shown in FIG. 14 is won, and the condition device shown in FIG. 15 In the winning, neither of them decides to shift to the advantageous section and does not decide to add the advantageous section.
Although the number of settings 1 and 6 is typically shown in FIG. 15, in reality, as described above, the set value has 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6 and is set. The number of places for each value is specified.

In FIGS. 14 and 15, since the condition device including 1BBA or 1BBB is drawn only in the non-internal part, it is drawn in the non-RT, RT1 to RT3. Further, 1BBA and 1BBB have a case of winning alone and a case of winning multiple times with the small winning combination D, E1 or E2. On the other hand, the small winning combination D, E1 or E2 may be elected independently. The condition device including 1BBA or 1BBB drawn by RT4 is treated as a single winning of the small winning combination D, E1 or E2. Therefore, the total number of small wins D in RT4 is "580" to "585", and the total number of small wins E1 in RT4 is "1030". The total number of small winning combinations E2 in RT4 is "310" to "370".
Further, 1BBB is set as a winning combination when a condition device having a setting difference is won, and it is decided to shift to an advantageous section or add an advantageous section based on the winning of 1BBB. There is nothing.

In addition, Replay D is drawn only while 1BB is in operation. Furthermore, Replay E is drawn only at RT1. Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, after the operation of 1BBB is completed, the process shifts to RT1. Then, if Replay E is won in this RT1, an advantageous section is added (limited to the advantageous section). Therefore, in order to set it so that it does not appear in other RTs, the replay E is drawn only in RT1.
Further, the small winning combination D and E1 are drawn only when the accessory is not activated, and are not drawn when the accessory is activated.
On the other hand, the small winning combination F and G are not drawn when the accessory is not activated, and are drawn only when the accessory is activated.

Further, in FIG. 14, the total number of single winnings of 1BBA is "30", but in the present embodiment, the number of placements "20" determined to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the advantageous section It is divided into an interval "10" that decides not to shift. That is, in the case of a single winning of 1BBA, if the number "20" is won, when the game is a normal section, the advantageous section is also won at the same time. On the other hand, in the case of a single winning of 1BBA, if the number "10" is won, the advantageous section will not be won.

In addition, when 1BBA is won alone during the advantageous section, it is decided that the advantageous section will be added regardless of whether the number is "20" or "10".
Similarly, the number of single winnings of the small winning combination E1 is "1000" in total, but in the present embodiment, the number "250" determined to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the advantageous section It is divided into an interval "750" that decides not to shift to.

Not limited to this, when the single winning number of the small winning combination E1 is set to one placement number "1000" (not divided into the placement number "250" and the placement number "750") and the small winning combination E1 is won. In addition, it may be decided whether or not to shift to the advantageous section by a separate lottery. For example, there is a 25% chance of deciding to move to an advantageous section and a 75% chance of not deciding to move to an advantageous section. In this way, a number that wins the advantageous section and a number that does not win the advantageous section may be provided from the beginning, but the number itself is set to one value, and when the number is won, the section shifts to the advantageous section. A lottery (two-stage lottery) may be held to decide whether or not to do so. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of RT4 (inside the inside), it is not determined to shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, even when the small winning combination D or E1 is won, when it is RT4, it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section and the advantageous section is not added (“* 3” in FIG. 14). ..

In FIG. 15, when 1 BBB is won alone or when 1 BBB and small winning combination D are won in duplicate, no decision is made regarding the advantageous section. However, as will be described later, an opportunity to add an advantageous section is provided after the operation of 1BBB is completed (after the transition to RT1).
The small winning combination E2 has a case where the winning is duplicated with 1BBB and a case where the winning is single, but neither of them makes a decision regarding the advantageous section. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14, when the small winning combination E1 is won, a decision regarding the advantageous section may be made for both the single winning of the small winning combination E1 and the overlapping winning with 1BBA.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the condition devices of the replay A, the replay B group, and the replay C group have the same settings, but they are not determined to shift to the advantageous section and are added in the advantageous section. I don't decide.
However, not limited to the examples of FIGS. 14 and 15, when the condition devices for these replays are won, it is decided to shift to an advantageous section (including a lottery) or to add an advantageous section (including a lottery). ) May be provided. Alternatively, in FIG. 15, in the replay A, the replay B group, and the replay C group, the number of settings is slightly different between the setting 1 and the setting 6 (for example, "1" is different), and the replay A, the replay B group, And the replay C group may be set separately.

In FIG. 15, the replay A is drawn at all RTs when the accessory is not activated. In addition, the replay B1 group is drawn only at RT2. Furthermore, the replay group C is drawn only at RT3. The small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, and the small winning combination C group all have a setting difference between the setting 1 and the setting 6, but the number is the same in all RTs.

Further, as shown in the table of "special combination and small combination" in FIG. 15, in setting 1 and setting 6, the winning probability of 1BB and small combination is set higher in setting 6. Therefore, in this respect, setting 6 is more advantageous than setting 1.
Furthermore, as shown in the "Replay" table, RT3 has the highest probability of winning a replay. Then, in the advantageous section, since it is basically set to stay at RT3, not only the number of medals is increased by the operation of the instruction function when the push order bell is won, but also the number of medals is small due to the replay winning. ..

Further, the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, and the small winning combination C group are all set in the condition device having a setting difference. Here, the difference in the number of the small winning combination A between the setting 1 and the setting 6 is "250", and the difference in the number of the small winning combination B group (overall) between the setting 1 and the setting 6 is "240 (20 x 12)". ". Therefore, the small winning combination A has a larger difference in number than the small winning combination B group. As a result, the difference in the payout rate according to the set value can be surely provided by setting the number of small winning combinations A having no winning difference according to the pushing order to a larger value.
Further, since the combination of the symbols that can be won when the small winning combination A is won and the combination of the symbols that can be won when the push order is correct when the small winning combination B is won are set to be the same (described later), the small winning combination A is set. The set value cannot be estimated by counting the number of winnings (winnings).

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the probability of winning the small winning combination B group is set higher than the probability of winning the small winning combination C group. Here, the maximum number of payouts is 9 when the specified number is 3, and at least 1 instruction function operating game in which the number of payouts is 9 (maximum number of payouts with the specified number of 3) during the advantageous section. Need to run twice. Therefore, in the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function operating game at least once when the small winning combination B group is won. Therefore, by setting the winning probability of the small winning combination B group higher than the winning probability of the small winning combination C group, one instruction function operating game (small winning combination C group, replay B group, and replay C group is won). It is possible to reduce the expected number of games in the advantageous section that ends only with (excluding the games played). Furthermore, even though it is an advantageous section that ends after executing a predetermined number of games, it is less likely that the advantageous section cannot be ended because the small winning combination B group has never been won during the predetermined number of times. be able to.

The explanation is returned to FIG.
The winning flag control means 62 controls on / off of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61. In the present embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each combination for all the combinations. Then, when any of the conditional devices is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of the winning combination included in the conditional device is turned on (the winning flag is set).

For example, in the non-internal middle game, when the replay B1 is won, the two winning flags of the replay 01 and the replay 02 included in the condition device are turned on, and the winning flags of the other combinations are turned off.
Similarly, in the non-internal medium game, when the small winning combination B1 is won, the small winning combination 01, the small winning combination 03, the small winning combination 10, the small winning combination 11, the small winning combination 18, the small winning combination 19, and the small winning combination are included. The seven winning flags of the winning combination 26 are turned on, and the winning flags of the other winning combinations are turned off.

Furthermore, as described above, the winning of small roles and replays other than 1BB is not carried over, so even if the small role or replay is won in this game and the winning flag of these roles is turned on, the game ends this time. Sometimes the winning flag is turned off.
On the other hand, since the winning of 1BB is carried over, when the winning flag of 1BB is won in this game and the winning flag related to the winning 1BB is turned on once, the on state is maintained until the 1BB is won, and the winning state is maintained. It will be turned off when 1BB wins.

Further, for example, when the winning combination lottery means 61 wins 1BBA and the small winning combination D more than once, the winning flag of the small winning combination 35 corresponding to the 1BBA and the small winning combination D is turned on, and both roles may not win in the game. Therefore, for example, when 1BBA does not win, the winning flag of 1BBA is kept on and the winning flag of the small winning combination 35 is turned off regardless of whether the small winning combination 35 wins or does not win.

Furthermore, for example, when 1BBA is won alone by the role lottery means 61, the 1BBA winning flag is turned on in this game, and when 1BBA is not won in this game, the 1BBA winning flag is kept on. ..
Furthermore, when the small role A1 is won in the next game, in addition to the 1BBA that has carried over the winning, the winning flag of the small role 01 is turned on, and if 1BBA does not win at the end of this game, 1BBA The winning flag of is kept on, and the winning flag of the small winning combination 01 is turned off.

The push order instruction number selection means 63 selects the push order instruction number based on the lottery result of the condition device by the combination lottery means 61.
The "push order" of the push order instruction number selected here means a push order that is advantageous to the player. For example, when the small winning combination B group and the small winning combination C group are won, it refers to the pushing order in which the high-ranking bell is won. In addition, when a replay duplicate is won, it refers to a push order that promotes to an advantageous RT or a push order that does not cause a fall to an unfavorable RT.
In either the advantageous section or the normal section, the push order instruction number selection means 63 may select the push order instruction number, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only during the advantageous section, for example. The push order instruction number may be selected.
Further, the selected push order instruction number can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only during the advantageous section. Therefore, even if the push order instruction number is selected by the push order instruction number selection means 63 in the normal section (note that the push order instruction number may or may not be selected in the normal section), the push order instruction number is the sub-control board. It will not be sent to 80.
In the present embodiment, each condition device is provided with a unique push order instruction number.

The effect group number selection means 64 is an effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device, and selects a number to be transmitted to the sub control board 80.
As a result of drawing the condition device, it is also conceivable to transmit the winning prize and the replay condition device number itself to the sub control board 80. However, in the present embodiment, the winning prize and the replay condition device number itself are not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. As a result, the sub-control board 80 side cannot know the winning and replay condition device numbers (and thus the information on the correct answer pressing order) won in this game.

On the other hand, on the main control board 50 side, the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is predetermined. Then, after the lottery of the condition device, the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is selected, and the effect group number is transmitted to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the effect group number selected in the game this time, the sub-control board 80 can select and output the effect corresponding to the effect group number.

The reel control means 65 controls to start the rotation of all (three) reels 31 when the rotation start command of the reels 31 is received, particularly when the start switch 41 is operated in the present embodiment. Further, the reel control means 65 refers to the on / off of the winning flag in the game this time after the lottery of the condition device is performed by the winning combination lottery means 61, and the stop position determination table corresponding to the on / off of the winning flag. Is selected, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the stop switch 42 is operated, and the motor 32 is driven. It is controlled to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

For example, in the game in which at least one winning flag is turned on, the reel control means 65 sets a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination (the combination in which the winning flag is turned on) within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. The reel 31 is stopped and controlled so that it can be stopped on the effective line, and the reel 31 is stopped and controlled so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination other than the winning combination (the winning combination with the winning flag turned off) is not stopped on the effective line. ..

Here, "within the range of stop control of the reel 31" means the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops, or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (the number of moving frames (designs)). Means within range.
In the present embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 rotations in one minute at a constant speed.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 190 ms. As a result, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set to 4 frames.

For example, in FIG. 2, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first "replay" of the left reel 31 is located in the lower left stage (on the effective line), the left stop switch 42 is operated four frames ahead, that is, the fifth "bell". Up to "B" is a symbol that can be stopped in the lower left row. Therefore, in the above operation timing, the symbols No. 1 (stopping bitterness) to No. 5 (4 frames) are symbols that can be stopped in the lower left row.

However, not limited to the above, it is also possible to set the maximum number of moving frames to 4 from the next symbol of the symbol located on the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. In this case, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first "replay" of the left reel 31 is located at the lower left stage, the next symbol, that is, the second "blank" is started. Up to the 6th "replay", which is the symbol 4 frames ahead, is the symbol that can be stopped in the lower left row. Therefore, at the above operation timing, the symbols 2 to 6 are symbols that can be stopped in the lower left row.
In the following description, the maximum number of moving frames from the symbol located on the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated will be described as 4 frames.

First, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, when any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped at a predetermined effective line, when the stop switch 42 is operated. The symbol is controlled to stop at a predetermined effective line.

That is, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, and the symbol related to the winning combination does not stop at a predetermined effective line, the stop control of the reel 31 is performed until the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotation and movement of the reel 31 within the range of, the design related to the winning combination is controlled to be stopped at a predetermined effective line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

On the contrary, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination stops at the effective line, the reel is stopped when the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotation and movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control of 31, it is controlled so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped on the effective line (kicking stop control).
Further, in the game in which a plurality of winning combinations are won, the priority order of the winning combination is predetermined according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42. Controls the pull-in stop of the symbol with the highest priority.

Further, the reel control means 65 detects the pressing order (operation order) of the stop switch 42. The reel control means 65 detects which of the left, middle, and right stop switches 42 is operated when the stop switch 42 is operated by the player.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal indicating that the stop switch 42 is operated is input to the reel control means 65. By discriminating this signal, the reel control means 65 detects which stop switch 42 has been operated. Then, the stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is executed.

Further, the reel control means 65 includes a stop position determination table for each condition device. The stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, in each stop position determination table, for example, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first symbol (“replay” in the case of the left reel 31) passes through the lower left stage (on the effective line), what is it? The stop position is predetermined, such as controlling the movement of only the symbol (with how many frames) and stopping the symbol at the lower left.

Here, the symbol arrangement in the present embodiment will be described.
First, as shown in FIG. 2, four "replays" are arranged at intervals of five symbols on all reels 31. As a result, the "replay" of all reels 31 is in the "PB = 1" arrangement.
Similarly, in the left reel 31, four "bell A" or "bell B" are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the total arrangement of these two symbols is "PB = 1".
Further, in the middle reel 31, four "bells C" are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the "bell C" of the middle reel 31 is arranged at "PB = 1".
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, four "bell A" or "bell B" are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the total arrangement of these two symbols is "PB = 1".

Further, in the right reel 31, four "cherries" are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the "cherries" on the right reel 31 are arranged at "PB = 1".
Further, on the left reel 31, four "black 7" or "watermelon" are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. As a result, the total arrangement of these two symbols is "PB = 1".
Similarly, on the middle reel 31, four "blue 7" or "cherry" are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the total arrangement of these two symbols is "PB = 1".
Similarly, on the right reel 31, four "black 7", "blue 7", "blank", or "red 7" are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. As a result, the total of these four symbols is "PB = 1".

On the other hand, in the left reel 31, "cherries" are arranged at Nos. 3, 8 and 13, so they are not arranged at "PB = 1".
Similarly, for the "watermelon", the left and middle reels 31 have a "PB ≠ 1" arrangement, and the right reel 31 has a "PB = 1" arrangement.

Hereinafter, the stop position determination table corresponding to each condition device will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 13 described above.
First, the stop position determination table at the time of winning and winning the replay condition device will be described.
The non-winning table is used in a game when a winning combination is not won, and defines a combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped so that the combination of symbols corresponding to any winning combination does not stop at the effective line.

The replay A table is used at the time of replay A winning (single winning of replay 01), and the reel is used so that the replay 01 is stopped at the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. The stop position of 31 is defined. The symbols of the reels 31 related to the replay 01 and the replays 02 to 06 described later are all the reels 31 in the “PB = 1” arrangement. Therefore, when a replay is won, the winning replay (when a plurality of replays are duplicately won, one of the duplicate winning replays) is always won.

The replay B1 table is used in the game when the replay B1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, when the left first stop (when the push order is correct), the replay 02 is stopped at the effective line and the left first stop. Other than the time (when the push order is incorrect), the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 01 is stopped at the effective line (see FIG. 10).

First, in a game in which the replay B1 table is used, "Black 7" or "Watermelon" is stopped in the lower left row at the time of the first left stop ("PB = 1" as described above). In this case, "replay" stops at the upper left.
Next, at the time of the second middle stop, the "replay" is stopped in the middle middle stage. Then, at the time of the third stop on the right, "cherry" is stopped in the upper right row. In this case, "replay" stops at the lower right. As a result, "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Replay"-"Cherry" stops on the effective line, and Replay 02 wins. Further, "replay"-"replay"-"replay" is stopped in "upper left stage"-"middle middle stage"-"lower right stage".

On the other hand, in the game in which the replay B1 table is used, "blue 7" or "cherry" is stopped in the middle middle stage at the time of the first middle stop ("PB = 1"). In this case, "replay" stops in the upper middle row. After that, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "black 7" or "watermelon" is stopped in the lower left stage ("PB = 1"). At this time, as described above, "replay" stops at the upper left.
When the right reel 31 is stopped, "replay" is stopped in the upper right row ("PB = 1"). As a result, "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Blue 7 / Cherry"-"Replay" stops on the effective line, and Replay 01 wins. Further, "replay"-"replay"-"replay" is stopped in "upper left"-"middle upper"-"upper right".

In the game in which the replay B1 table is used, the control is the same at the time of the first right stop as at the time of the first stop at the middle.
Further, with respect to the replay B2 table when the replay B2 is won and the replay B3 table when the replay B3 is won, the replay 02 is won when the push order is correct and the replay 01 is won when the push order is incorrect by the same control as described above.

The replay C1 table is used in the game when the replay C1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, when the left first stop (when the push order is correct), the replay 01 is stopped at the effective line and the left first stop. Other than the time (when the push order is incorrect), the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 03 is stopped at the effective line (see FIG. 10).

First, in the game in which the replay C1 table is used, the control of stopping the replay 01 at the effective line at the time of the first left stop is the same as that of the replay B1 table, so the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, in the game in which the replay C1 table is used, the "replay" is stopped in the middle middle stage at the time of the first middle stop ("PB = 1"). After that, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped in the lower left stage ("PB = 1"). In this case, "replay" stops in the middle left. When the right reel 31 is stopped, the "watermelon" is stopped in the upper right row ("PB = 1"). In this case, "replay" stops in the middle right. As a result, "Bell A / Bell B"-"Replay"-"Watermelon" stops on the effective line, and the replay 03 is won. Further, "replay"-"replay"-"replay" is stopped at "left middle stage"-"middle middle stage"-"right middle stage".

In the game in which the replay C1 table is used, the control is the same at the time of the first right stop as at the time of the first stop at the middle.
Furthermore, for the replay C2 table when the replay C2 is won and the replay C3 table when the replay C3 is won, the replay 01 is won when the push order is correct and the replay 03 is won when the push order is incorrect by the same control as above. ..

The replay D table is used in the game when the replay D is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is set so as to stop the replay 06 on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. It is a fixed one. Replay 06 is "PB = 1".
Further, the replay E table is used in the game at the time of winning the replay E, and the reel is used so that the replay 04 or 05 is stopped at the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. The stop position of 31 is defined. In this case, either Replay 04 or 05 can be stopped at "PB = 1".

The small winning combination A table is used in the game when the small winning combination A is won, and the small winning combination 01 is stopped at the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. It defines the stop position. The combination of the symbols of the small winning combination 01 is "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell C"-"replay", and "PB = 1" on all reels 31. When "Black 7 / Watermelon" stops in the lower left row, "Bell A / Bell B" stops in the middle left row. Furthermore, when "Replay" stops in the upper right row, "Bell A / Bell B" stops in the middle right row. Therefore, when the small winning combination 01 is won, "Bell A / Bell B"-"Bell C"-"Bell A / Bell B" stops at "Left middle tier"-"Middle middle tier"-"Right middle tier".

The small winning combination B1 table is used in the game when the small winning combination B1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, when the left first stop (when the push order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is stopped at the effective line and left. Except for the first stop (when the push order is incorrect), the one-card combination included in the winning combination (when the small combination B1 is won, one of the small combination 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, 26) is played. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop at the effective line or stop any of the pattern symbols 01 to 03.

In the game in which the small winning combination B1 table is used, the left first stop (when the push order is correct) is the same as that of the small winning combination A table, so the explanation is omitted.
Even when the following small winning combination B2 table to small winning combination B12 table are used, the same stop control as the small winning combination A table is performed when the push order is correct.
As a result, when the small winning combination A is won and when the small winning combination B is won, the small winning combination 01 always wins, and the "left middle row"-"middle middle row"-"right middle row" is displayed. "Bell A / Bell B"-"Bell C"-"Bell A / Bell B" stops. Therefore, even if the small winning combination 01 wins in a game in which the instruction function is not activated, the player does not know whether the small winning combination A is won or the push order is correct when the small winning combination B group is won.

Further, even during the advantageous section, when the small winning combination A is won, if the instruction function is activated by the dummy as described above, the player can determine whether the small winning combination A is won or the small winning combination B group is won. I don't know.
As described above, in the present embodiment, since there is a setting difference in the number of winnings of the small winning combination A, it is possible to estimate the set value by counting the number of winnings of the small winning combination A. However, if the stop rolls are the same when the small role A is won and when the push order is correct when the small role B group is won, it is not possible to count only the number of winnings of the small role A, so the set value. Can no longer be guessed.

Further, more specifically, in the game in which the small winning combination B1 table is used, the following stop control is executed.
First, when the small winning combination B1 is won, as shown in FIG. 11, seven small winning combinations 01, 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, and 26 are won, and the combinations of the symbols are as follows.
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 sheets)
Small role 03: "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 10: "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 11: "Bell C"-"Bell A"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 18: "Red 7"-"Bell B"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 19: "Bell C"-"Blue 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 26: "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)

Then, the following method can be mentioned as the stop control of the reel 31 when a plurality of small winning combinations having different payout numbers are elected in duplicate. As a first priority, when all the symbols (of the reel 31) constituting the winning symbol combination can be stopped at the effective line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.

Next, when it is not possible to "stop all the symbols that make up the winning combination of symbols on the effective line" (when the first priority cannot be adopted), the second priority is "number of sheets priority". , Or "number priority" to stop and control the reel 31.
Here, "number priority" means that among the combinations of symbols that have been won in duplicate, the symbols of the reel 31 that constitutes the combination of the symbols with the largest number of payouts are preferentially stopped (pulled in) to the effective line. To say. Therefore, when the small winning combination B group is won, the small winning combination 01 corresponds to the combination of the symbols with the largest number of payouts (9).
On the other hand, "number priority" means stopping the symbols of the reel 31 at the effective line so that the number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped at the effective line is the largest.

For example, when the small winning combination B1 is won and the middle first stop is made, all the middle reels 31 related to the winning winning combination cannot be stopped at the effective line at the same time. This is because there are a plurality of types of symbols of the winning small winning medium reel 31, whereas there is only one effective line, so only one type of symbol can be stopped at the effective line.

Therefore, when the small winning combination B group is won, the reel 31 is stopped and controlled by either the number priority or the number priority. In the present embodiment, when the push order is correct, the reels are stopped and controlled by giving priority to the number of sheets, and when the push order is incorrect, the reels 31 are stopped and controlled by giving priority to the number of sheets. When the reels are stopped and controlled by giving priority to the number of reels, the small winning combination 01 (9-card winning combination) is configured so that one winning combination can be won without winning (so that it may be missed).
In this way, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is such that the number of sheets is prioritized in a specific pressing order (correct answer pressing order in the present embodiment), and the number is prioritized in another pressing order (incorrect answer pressing order in the present embodiment). Depending on the number of sheets, priority is given to the number of sheets or the number of sheets.

In the above example, when the number is prioritized at the time of the middle first stop (when the push order is incorrect), if either "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line, the number is stopped at the effective line. The maximum number of possible combinations of symbols is two each. For example, if "Bell A" is stopped at the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the small winning combination 03 or 11 can be won. Since "Bell A" or "Bell B" of the middle reel 31 is "PB = 1" in the sum of the two symbols, either "Bell A" or "Bell B" is always stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped. Can be made to.
Here, it is assumed that the "bell A" is stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped. In this case, at this point, the small winning combination 03 or 11 can be won.

Next, when stopping the left reel 31, priority is given to stopping "bell A" or "bell C" at the effective line. As shown in FIG. 2, in the left reel 31, "bell A" is arranged at Nos. 15 and 0, and "Bell C" is arranged at Nos. 18. Therefore, when the symbols of the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated are the 11th to the 19th and the 0th, the "bell A" or the "bell C" can be stopped at the effective line. When the numbers are 1 to 10, "Bell A" or "Bell C" cannot be stopped at the effective line.

Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped at random (without aiming at a specific symbol), "Bell A" or "Bell C" is stopped at the effective line with a probability of "1/2". In particular, in the present embodiment, since "Bell A" can be stopped without stopping "Bell C", the symbols of the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated are Nos. 11 to 19 and 0. When is, "Bell A" is always stopped at the effective line.
In this way, stopping "Bell A" without stopping "Bell C" makes it possible to display the pattern symbol described later when the winning combination is missed at the time of the third stop. This is because the pattern symbol cannot be displayed if "Bell C" is stopped when the left reel 31 is stopped).

On the other hand, when the "bell A" cannot be stopped at the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped, control is performed so that one of the pattern symbols is stopped at the effective line. As shown in FIG. 9, among the pattern symbols in which the symbol of the middle reel 31 is "bell A", the symbol of the left reel 31 is "black 7" or "watermelon". Since the "black 7" or "watermelon" on the left reel 31 is "PB = 1" in the sum of the two symbols, any one of these symbols can always be stopped.

Therefore, at the time of the middle first stop and the left second stop, it becomes "bell A"-"bell A"-"rotating", or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating". ..
Further, when "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" is set before the third stop on the right, "Bell A" can be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped. Stop "Bell A". As shown in FIG. 2, in order to stop "Bell A" at the effective line, "Bell A" is stopped if the design of the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is in the range of 4 to 13. It can be made to stop, and "Bell A" cannot be stopped in other ranges. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, the "bell A" is stopped at the effective line with a probability of "1/2". When "Bell A" is stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, it becomes "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A", and the small winning combination 03 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", if "Bell A" cannot be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Cherry" is set as the effective line. Stop ("PB = 1"). As a result, the combination of symbols on the effective line becomes "bell A"-"bell A"-"cherry", and the pattern symbol 03 is stopped.
Further, in the case of "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line ("PB = 1"). ). As a result, the combination of symbols on the effective line becomes "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"bell A / bell B", and the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line at the time of the first stop (when the push order is incorrect) when the small winning combination B1 is won. In this case, at this point, the small winning combination 10 or 18 can be won.
Next, when stopping the left reel 31, priority is given to stopping the symbol "bell B" or "red 7" related to the small winning combination 10 or 18 at the effective line. As shown in FIG. 2, in the left reel 31, "Bell B" is arranged at Nos. 5 and 10, and "Red 7" is arranged at Nos. 7. Therefore, when the design of the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is No. 1 to No. 10, "Bell B" or "Red 7" can be stopped at the effective line, and other than that. At some times, "Bell B" or "Red 7" cannot be stopped at the effective line.

Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped randomly (without aiming at a specific symbol), "Bell B" or "Red 7" is stopped at the effective line with a probability of "1/2". In particular, in the present embodiment, since "Bell B" can be stopped without stopping "Red 7", when the design of the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is No. 1 to No. 10. Always stops "Bell B" at the active line.

On the other hand, when the "bell B" cannot be stopped at the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped, control is performed so that one of the pattern symbols is stopped at the effective line. As shown in FIG. 9, the pattern symbol in which the symbol of the middle reel 31 is "bell B" is "black 7" or "watermelon". Since the "black 7" or "watermelon" on the left reel 31 is "PB = 1" in the sum of the two symbols, any one of these symbols can always be stopped.

Therefore, at the time of the middle first stop and the left second stop, it becomes "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating", or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating". ..
Further, when "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" is set before the third stop on the right, "Bell B" can be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped. Stop "Bell B". As shown in FIG. 2, in order to stop "Bell B" at the effective line, the design of the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated should be in the range of 14 to 18 or 19 to 3. For example, "Bell B" can be stopped, and "Bell B" cannot be stopped in other ranges. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, the "bell B" is stopped at the effective line with a probability of "1/2". When "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" is obtained, and the small winning combination 10 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Rotating", if "Bell B" cannot be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Cherry" is set as the effective line. Stop ("PB = 1"). As a result, the combination of symbols on the effective line becomes "bell B"-"bell B"-"cherry", and the pattern symbol 03 stops.
Further, in the case of "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell B"-"Rotating", when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line ("PB = 1"). ). As a result, the combination of symbols on the effective line becomes "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"bell A / bell B", and the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

From the above, at the time of the first stop in the middle when the small winning combination B1 is won, the middle reel 31 can stop the symbol related to the one-card combination at "PB = 1", and the left and right reels 31 are both "1". With a probability of "/ 2", the symbol related to the 1-card combination can be stopped. Further, when the symbol related to the single card combination cannot be stopped, the pattern symbol can be stopped at any time. Therefore, at the time of the first stop at the time of winning the small role B1 (when the push order is incorrect),
1-card combination: Winning with a probability of 1/4 Pattern pattern: Stops with a probability of 3/4.
Furthermore, when winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (small role 03)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small role 10)
Will be one of.

Next, the case where the small winning combination B1 is won and the right first stop is described will be described. When giving priority to the number when the right reel 31 is stopped, if either "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line, the number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped at the effective line is two each. Becomes the maximum. For example, if "Bell A" is stopped at the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, the small winning combination 03 or 19 can be won. Since the "bell A" or "bell B" of the right reel 31 is "PB = 1" in the sum of the two symbols, the "bell A" or "bell B" can always be stopped when the right reel 31 is stopped. it can.
First, it is assumed that "Bell A" is stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped. In this case, at this point, the small winning combination 03 or 19 can be won.

Next, when stopping the left reel 31, priority is given to stopping the symbol "bell A" or "bell C" related to the small winning combination 03 or 19 at the effective line. Here, as in the above, priority is given to stopping "Bell A". "Bell A" can be stopped with a probability of "1/2". If "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7" or "Watermelon" is stopped ("PB = 1" in total of 2 symbols).

Therefore, at the time of the first right stop and the second left stop, it is either "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A". ..
Further, when "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" is set before the middle third stop, when "Bell A" can be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" can be stopped. Stop "Bell A". As shown in FIG. 2, in order to stop "Bell A" at the effective line, "Bell A" is stopped if the design of the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is in the range of 5 to 14. It can be made to stop, and "Bell A" cannot be stopped in other ranges. Therefore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped at random, the "bell A" is stopped at the effective line with a probability of "1/2". When "Bell A" is stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, it becomes "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A", and the small winning combination 03 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", if "Bell A" cannot be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Blue 7" or "Cherry" Is stopped at the effective line (“PB = 1” in the sum of the two symbols). As a result, the pattern symbol 02 stops at the effective line.
Further, in the case of "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A", when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the effective line ("PB = 1"). ). As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops at the effective line.

Further, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line at the first stop of the right reel 31. In this case, at this point, the small winning combination 10 or 26 can be won.
Next, when stopping the left reel 31, priority is given to stopping the symbol "bell B" or "red 7" related to the small winning combination 10 or 26 at the effective line. Here, priority is given to stopping "Bell B". "Bell B" can be stopped with a probability of "1/2". If "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7" or "Watermelon" is stopped ("PB = 1" in total of 2 symbols).

Therefore, at the time of the first right stop and the second left stop, it is either "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell B" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B". ..
Further, when "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" is set before the middle third stop, when "Bell B" can be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Bell B" can be stopped. Stop "Bell B". Here, when the middle reel 31 is stopped at random, the "bell B" is stopped at the effective line with a probability of "1/2". When "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" is obtained, and the small winning combination 10 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell B", if "Bell B" cannot be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Blue 7" or "Cherry" Is stopped at the effective line (“PB = 1” in the sum of the two symbols). As a result, the pattern symbol 02 stops at the effective line.
Further, in the case of "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B", when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the effective line ("PB = 1"). ). As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops at the effective line.

From the above, at the time of the first right stop when the small winning combination B1 is won, the right reel 31 can stop the symbol related to the one-card combination at "PB = 1", and both the left and right reels 31 have "1". With a probability of "/ 2", the symbol related to the 1-card combination can be stopped. Further, when the symbol related to the single card combination cannot be stopped, the pattern symbol can be stopped at any time. Therefore, at the time of the first stop on the right when the small role B1 is won (when the push order is incorrect),
1-card combination: Winning with a probability of 1/4 Pattern pattern: Stops with a probability of 3/4.
Furthermore, when winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (small role 03)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small role 10)
Will be one of.
The winning rate and the stop rate of the pattern symbol are the same as those at the time of the first stop.
Therefore, when the small winning combination B1 is won, when the left first stop (when the push order is correct), the small winning combination 01 wins with "PB = 1". On the other hand, at the time of the first stop in the middle or right (when the push order is incorrect), one card wins with a probability of "1/4", and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". ..

When the small winning combination B2 is won, the small winning combination B2 table is provided as in the case where the small winning combination B1 is won. The winning roles included when the small role B2 is won are
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 sheets)
Small role 04: "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 09: "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 12: "Bell C"-"Bell A"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 17: "Red 7"-"Bell B"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 20: "Bell C"-"Blue 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 25: "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Is.

Then, at the time of the first left stop (when the push order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of the middle first stop (when the push order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line by giving priority to the number.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the first middle stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C" at the time of left stop. Here, when the "bell C" can be stopped, the "bell A" can be stopped, so the "bell A" is stopped without stopping the "bell C". If "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating".

When "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell B" when it is stopped to the right. As a result, the small role 04 will be won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped when stopped to the right, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" is set, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped at the time of the first middle stop. In this case, when stopping to the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7". Here, since "Bell B" can be stopped when "Red 7" can be stopped, "Bell B" is stopped without stopping "Red 7". If "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell B"-"Rotating".

When "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped when it is stopped to the right, and "Bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop. As a result, the small role 09 will be won. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped when stopping to the right, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" is set, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, at the time of the first right stop when the small winning combination B2 is won (when the push order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line by giving priority to the number.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the first right stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" at the time of left stop. Here, since "Bell B" can be stopped when "Red 7" can be stopped, "Bell B" is stopped without stopping "Red 7". If "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A".

When "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", "Bell B" is stopped when "Bell B" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the small role 09 will be won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7 / Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" is reached, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of medium stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped at the first right stop. In this case, when stopping to the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C". Here, when the "bell C" can be stopped, the "bell A" can be stopped, so the "bell A" is stopped without stopping the "bell C". If "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell B".

When "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell B", "Bell A" is stopped when "Bell A" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the small role 04 will be won. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7 / Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" is displayed, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

From the above, when the small role B2 is won, when the push order is incorrect,
1-card combination: Winning with a probability of 1/4 Pattern pattern: Stops with a probability of 3/4.
Furthermore, when winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (small role 04)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (small role 09)
Will be one of.

When the small winning combination B3 is won, the small winning combination B3 table is provided as in the case where the small winning combination B1 is won. The winning roles included when the small role B3 is won are
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 sheets)
Small role 05: "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 08: "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (1 sheet) Small role 13: "Bell C"-"Bell B"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 16: "Red 7"-"Bell A"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 21: "Bell C"-"Red 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 24: "Red 7"-"Blue 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Is.

Then, at the time of the first left stop (when the push order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of the middle first stop (when the push order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line by giving priority to the number.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the first middle stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" at the time of left stop. Here, in the same manner as above, "Bell B" is stopped without stopping "Red 7". If "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating".

When "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped when "Bell B" can be stopped when stopped to the right. As a result, the small role 08 will be won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped when stopped to the right, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" is set, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped at the time of the first middle stop. In this case, when stopping to the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C". Here, the "bell A" is stopped without stopping the "bell C" in the same manner as described above. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell B"-"Rotating".

When "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell A" when it is stopped to the right. As a result, the small role 05 will be awarded. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped when stopping to the right, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" is set, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, at the time of the first right stop when the small winning combination B2 is won (when the push order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line by giving priority to the number.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the first right stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C" at the time of left stop. Here, the "bell A" is stopped in the same manner as described above. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A".

When "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", "Bell B" is stopped when "Bell B" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the small role 05 will be awarded. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7 / Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" is reached, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of medium stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped at the first right stop. In this case, when stopping to the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7". Here, the "bell B" is stopped in the same manner as described above. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell B".

When "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell B", "Bell A" is stopped when "Bell A" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the small role 08 will be won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7 / Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" is displayed, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

From the above, when the small role B3 is won, when the push order is incorrect,
1-card combination: Winning with a probability of 1/4 Pattern pattern: Stops with a probability of 3/4.
Furthermore, when winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (small role 05)
"Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (small role 08)
Will be one of.

When the small winning combination B4 is won, the small winning combination B4 table is provided as in the case where the small winning combination B1 is won. The winning roles included when the small role B4 is won are
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 sheets)
Small role 06: "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 07: "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 14: "Bell C"-"Bell B"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 15: "Red 7"-"Bell A"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 22: "Bell C"-"Red 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 23: "Red 7"-"Blue 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Is.

Then, at the time of the first left stop (when the push order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of the middle first stop (when the push order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line by giving priority to the number.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the middle first stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" at the time of left stop, but here, the same as above. Stop "Bell B". If "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating".

When "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell A" when it is stopped to the right. As a result, the small role 07 will be won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped when stopped to the right, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" is set, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped at the time of the first middle stop. In this case, when stopping to the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C". Here, the "bell A" is stopped in the same manner as described above. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell B"-"Rotating".

When "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell B" when it is stopped to the right. As a result, the small role 06 will be won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped when stopped to the right, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" is set, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, at the time of the first right stop when the small winning combination B4 is won (when the push order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line by giving priority to the number.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the first right stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" at the time of left stop. Here, the "bell B" is stopped in the same manner as described above. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A".

When "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", "Bell A" is stopped when "Bell A" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the small role 07 will be won. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7 / Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" is reached, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of medium stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped at the first right stop. In this case, when stopping to the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C". Here, the "bell A" is stopped in the same manner as described above. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7 / Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it is either "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell B".

When "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell B", "Bell B" is stopped when "Bell B" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the small role 06 will be won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7 / Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" is displayed, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

From the above, when the small role B4 is won, when the push order is incorrect,
1-card combination: Winning with a probability of 1/4 Pattern pattern: Stops with a probability of 3/4.
Furthermore, when winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small role 06)
"Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (small role 07)
Will be one of.

Hereinafter, detailed description of each of the small winning combination B5 table to the small winning combination B12 table at the time of winning the small winning combination B5 to B12 will be omitted, and only the outline thereof will be described.
In the small winning combination B5 table used when the small winning combination B5 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the middle first stop, which is the correct answer in the pushing order, and the small winning combination 03 or the small winning combination has a probability of "1/4" when the pushing order is incorrect. The winning combination 10 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B1 is won.
Further, in the small winning combination B6 table used when the small winning combination B6 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the first stop in the middle when the pushing order is correct, and the small winning combination 04 has a probability of "1/4" when the pushing order is incorrect. Alternatively, the small winning combination 09 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B2 is won.

Furthermore, in the small winning combination B7 table used when the small winning combination B7 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the first stop in the middle when the push order is correct, and there is a probability of "1/4" when the push order is incorrect. 05 or small winning combination 08 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B3 is won.
Furthermore, in the small winning combination B8 table used when the small winning combination B8 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the first stop in the middle when the pushing order is correct, and the small winning combination 06 has a probability of "1/4" when the pushing order is incorrect. Alternatively, the small winning combination 07 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B4 is won.

In the small winning combination B9 table used when the small winning combination B9 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins when the right first stop is when the push order is correct, and when the push order is incorrect, there is a probability of "1/4" for the small win 03 or small win. The winning combination 10 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B1 is won.
Further, in the small winning combination B10 table used when the small winning combination B10 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the first right stop when the pushing order is correct, and the small winning combination 04 has a probability of "1/4" when the pushing order is incorrect. Alternatively, the small winning combination 09 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B2 is won.

Furthermore, in the small winning combination B11 table used when the small winning combination B11 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the first right stop when the push order is correct, and there is a probability of "1/4" when the push order is incorrect. 05 or small winning combination 08 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B3 is won.
Furthermore, in the small winning combination B12 table used when the small winning combination B12 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the first right stop, which is the correct answer in the push order, and the small win 06 has a probability of "1/4" when the push order is incorrect. Alternatively, the small winning combination 07 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B4 is won.

As is clear from the above, the one-card winning combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect at the time of winning the small winning combination B group is the small winning combination 03 to the small winning combination 10. Therefore, small wins other than the above included in each condition device will not win a prize. The setting in this way is related to the one-card combination that can be won when the small combination C group, which will be described later, is won.

The small winning combination C1 table is used in the game when the small winning combination C1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, when the left first stop (when the push order is correct), the small winning combination 02 is stopped at the effective line and left. Except for the first stop (when the push order is incorrect), the one-card combination included in the winning combination (when the small combination C1 is won, any of the small combination 03 to 10) is stopped at the effective line. The stop position of the reel 31 is defined.

Small win C1 (same for small wins C2 and C3, which will be described later) When the push order is correct, the small win 02 (3 wins) will be won by prioritizing the number of coins, as in the case of winning the small win B group. Control. As shown in FIG. 4, the combination of symbols corresponding to the small winning combination 02 is "bell A / bell B"-"blue 7 / cherry"-"watermelon", and "PB = 1" on all reels 31. .. Therefore, when the push order is correct, the small winning combination 02 can always be won.

In addition, when the small winning combination C1 is won, when the pushing order is incorrect (at the time of the first stop in the middle or the right), the number of winning winning combination (small winning combination 03 to 10) is controlled by giving priority to the number of pieces. Here, as shown in FIG. 5, the combination of the symbols of the small combinations 03 to 10 is a combination of the symbols of "bell A" or "bell B" for each reel 31. Further, among the combinations of the symbols of the small winning combinations 03 to 10, there are four "bell A" and four "bell B" in each reel 31, and either "bell A" or "bell B" can be used. Even if it is stopped, the condition of quantity priority is satisfied. In particular, when the small winning combination C2 and the small winning combination C3 are won, the small winning combination 21 and the small winning combination 22 are included, respectively, but even if these small winning combinations are included in the winning combination, the type of the symbol that gives priority to the number does not change. Further, in all reels 31, "bell A" or "bell B" is "PB = 1" in total of the two symbols. Therefore, any one of the small winning combinations 03 to 10 can always be won.

From the above, when the small winning combination C1 is won, the small winning combination 02 (3 cards) wins when the pushing order is correct (“PB = 1”), and when the pushing order is incorrect, either small winning combination 03 to 10 (1). The card combination) wins (“PB = 1”), and there is no omission (stopping of the pattern pattern) as in the case of winning the small combination B group.

The small winning combination C2 table and the small winning combination C3 table used at the time of winning the small winning combination C2 and the small winning combination C3 are the same as those of the small winning combination C1 table. As shown in FIG. 13, when the small winning combination C2 is won, the middle first stop is in the correct answer pushing order, and when the small winning combination C3 is won, the right first stop is in the correct answer pushing order. Since the stop control for winning the small winning combination 02 or the small winning combination 03 to 10 is the same as when the small winning combination C1 is won, the explanation is omitted.

Therefore, a 1-card combination (small combination 03 to 10) that can be stopped when the push order is incorrect when the small combination B group is won, and a 1-card combination (small combination 03 to 10) that can be stopped when the push order is incorrect when the small combination C group is won. Small roles 03 to 10) are the same. As a result, it is not possible to determine whether the small winning combination B group or the small winning combination C group has been won in the game just by looking at the winning of the small winning combination 03-10.

The small winning combination D table is used in the game when the small winning combination D is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the small winning combination 35 on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. In the small winning combination D table, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 does not matter. As shown in FIG. 6, the combination of the symbols of the small winning combination 35 is a set of "watermelons". The "watermelon" has a "PB ≠ 1" arrangement on the left and middle reels 31 and a "PB = 1" arrangement on the right reel 31. Therefore, in the game in which the small winning combination D table is used, in the left and middle reels 31, if the stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the "watermelon" stops at the effective line, the "watermelon" stops at the effective line. When the stop switch 42 is operated at a timing when the "watermelon" does not stop at the effective line, the "watermelon" does not stop at the effective line and the small winning combination 35 is missed.

The small winning combination E1 table is used in the game when the small winning combination E1 is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the small winning combination 36 or 38 on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. Is. Here, as shown in FIG. 13, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the left or middle first stop, it becomes a so-called middle-stage cherry stop type (so that the "cherry" stops at the left middle stage). The stop position of the reel 31 is determined. On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the first right stop, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the middle cherry does not stop.

It should be noted that the winning of the small winning combination E1 includes the small winning combination 36 and 38 (furthermore, the small winning combination 37 is included when the small winning combination E2 is won, which will be described later). The number / number priority is not applied, and the reel 31 can be stopped by an arbitrary stop control determined in advance. Therefore, it is controlled to give priority to the winning of the small winning combination 36 at the time of the left or middle first stop, and to give priority to the winning of the small winning combination 38 at the time of the right first stop.

In FIG. 2, the “cherries” on the left reel 31 are Nos. 3, 8 and 13 (“PB ≠ 1”). Then, when "cherry" is stopped in the middle left row, "blank" or "red 7" is stopped in the effective line in the lower left row. Therefore, in this case, the symbol related to the small winning combination 36 is stopped for the left reel 31.

For example, when the 7th "Red 7" is stopped in the lower left row at the first left stop ("Cherry" is stopped in the middle left row), "Blue 7" or "Cherry" is valid when the middle reel 31 is stopped. Stop at the line ("PB = 1"), and when the right reel 31 is stopped, either "Black 7", "Blue 7", "Red 7", or "Blank" (4 symbols combined, "PB =" 1 ”) is stopped at the effective line. As a result, the small role 36 is won.
Further, when the 2nd or 12th "blank" is stopped in the lower left stage when the left reel 31 is stopped ("cherry" is stopped in the middle left stage), the same as above, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "" Stop "Blue 7" or "Cherry" at the effective line, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, stop either "Black 7", "Blue 7", "Red 7", or "Blank" at the effective line. .. As a result, the small role 36 is won.

Stop control is performed in the same manner as above when the middle first stop is performed. Therefore, the middle and right reels 31 have a case where the symbol related to the small winning combination 36 stops at "PB = 1", and the left reel 31 has a case where "red 7" or "blank" stops and a case where it does not stop (for the left reel 31). "PB ≠ 1").
However, if "Red 7" or "Blank" cannot be stopped in the lower left row at the time of the first stop on the left or middle, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped. "Bell A" or "Bell B" can be stopped at "PB = 1". In this case, the stop type is "Bell A / Bell B"-"Blue 7 / Cherry"-"Black 7 / Blue 7 / Red 7 / Blank", and the small winning combination 38 wins.

On the other hand, in the game in which the small winning combination E1 table is used, the winning of the small winning combination 38 is prioritized at the time of the first right stop. Therefore, in this case, "Bell A / Bell B"-"Blue 7 / Cherry"-"Black 7 / Blue 7 / Red 7 / Blank" stops, and the small winning combination 38 wins with "PB = 1". ..
Further, at the time of the first right stop, even if the "cherry" can be stopped at the left middle stage when the left reel 31 is stopped, the "cherry" is not stopped at the left middle stage, and the "bell A" or "bell" at the lower left stage. Stop "B" (in this case, "cherry" is not stopped in the middle left).

The small winning combination E2 table is used in the game when the small winning combination E1 is won, and the reel 31 is used so as to stop the small winning combination 36 or 38 (or the small winning combination 37) on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. It defines the stop position of.
Therefore, since the small winning combination E2 table can perform the same stop control as the small winning combination E1 table, it is possible to use the same stop position determination table.

Alternatively, in the case of the first left stop, only when "Red 7" or "Blank" can be stopped in the lower left stage (when the middle stage cherry is stopped), "Replay" is set to the effective line for the middle reel 31. It may be stopped (“PB = 1”), and any one of “black 7”, “blue 7”, “red 7”, or “blank” may be stopped for the right reel 31. As a result, the small role 37 wins a prize. If the stop control is performed in this way, it is possible to determine whether the small winning combination E1 is won or the small winning combination E2 is won when the middle cherry is stopped.

The small winning combination F table is used in the game when the small winning combination F is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is set so as to stop any of the small winning combination 01 to 39 on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. It is a fixed one.
In the present embodiment, the small winning combination F is drawn only during 1BB operation.
Further, the small winning combination F table performs stop control by giving priority to the number of sheets regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. As a result, the small role 39 is always won. In addition, in the left reel 31, since the arrangement of "PB = 1" is the sum of the two symbols of "cherry" or "bell C", the small winning combination 39 wins with "PB = 1".

The small winning combination G table is used in the game when the small winning combination G is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the small winning combination 40 on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. .. Since the small winning combination 40 is composed of a combination of symbols arranged with "PB = 1" for all reels 31, the small winning combination 40 can always be won in the game.

The 1BBA table is used when the game when the accessory condition device number "1" is won (1BBA alone is won), or when the 1BBA is won before the previous game and is not won in the game this time, and the stop control of the reel 31 is used. Within the range of, the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is stopped at the effective line, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the combinations other than 1BBA is determined so as not to stop at the effective line. It is a thing.
Since the symbol of 1BBA is "Red 7" on all reels 31 (PB ≠ 1), "Red 7" cannot be stopped at the effective line unless it is pressed.

Similarly, the 1BBB table is used when the game is won when the accessory condition device number "2" is won (1BBB is won alone), or when the 1BBB is won before the previous game and is not won in the game this time, and the reel 31 is used. Within the range of the stop control of, the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBB is stopped at the effective line, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the combinations other than 1BBB is not stopped at the effective line. The combination is defined.
Since the symbol of 1BBB is "PB ≠ 1" for all reels 31 as in 1BBA, "red 7" and "black 7" cannot be stopped at the effective line unless the eyes are pressed.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in a game in which 1BB and a small role or replay are duplicated, or in a game in which 1BB is won before the previous game and the small role or replay is won in this game, the following stop control is performed. Can be mentioned.

For example, first, priority is given to stopping both the winning 1BB and the small winning combination or replay symbol on the effective line, and when both symbols cannot be stopped on the effective line, the winning small symbol. A stop control that gives priority to stopping the combination or replay symbol on the effective line can be mentioned. Note that the stop control for stopping both the 1BB and the small win or replay symbol on the effective line is up to the second stop, and at the time of the third stop, 1BB or the small win or replay is controlled to win a prize, and a plurality of The role of is not duplicated.
Secondly, priority is given to stopping both the winning 1BB and the small winning combination or replay symbol on the effective line, and when both symbols cannot be stopped on the effective line, the winning 1BB There is a stop control (opposite to the above) that gives priority to stopping the symbol of.

Thirdly, although priority is given to stopping the winning small winning combination or replay symbol on the effective line, when stopping the winning small winning combination or replay symbol on the effective line, When the winning 1BB symbol can be stopped at the effective line at the same time, stop control for stopping at that position can be mentioned.

When 1BB (“PB ≠ 1”) and the small winning combination or replay of “PB = 1” are won in duplicate (when they are winning at the same time), the winning 1BB symbol and the small winning combination or replay It is not necessary to control to stop both the symbol and the symbol on the effective line, and it is also possible to control so that only the small winning combination of "PB = 1" or the symbol of the replay is stopped on the effective line. Therefore, since the small winning combination E1 and E2 are "PB = 1", only the small winning combination E1 or E2 is obtained when the 1BBA and the small winning combination E1 of the present embodiment are duplicated or when the 1BBB and the small winning combination E2 are duplicated. It is also possible to execute stop control to win a prize.

The explanation is returned to FIG.
When the reel 31 is stopped, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of the symbols of the reel 31 stopped on the effective line matches the combination of the symbols corresponding to any combination (whether any combination has won a prize). Whether or not) is judged. The winning determination means 66 determines a symbol on the effective line by detecting, for example, the angle at which the motor 32 is stopped, the number of steps, and the like.

When the winning determination means 66 determines that the combination of symbols stopped on the effective line when the reel 31 is stopped matches the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations, the payout means 67 wins the winning combination. , A predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player according to the winning combination, or processing such as addition of credits is performed. In addition, when the replay wins a prize, the number of medals inserted in the game this time is controlled to be automatically inserted without paying out the medals.

The RT control means 68 determines whether or not the RT transition condition is satisfied at each game and when all reels 31 are stopped, and if it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, the RT control means 68 controls to perform the RT transition. It is a thing.
As described above, the RT of the present embodiment includes non-RT, RT1 to RT4, 1BBA operation (1BBA game), and 1BBB operation (1BBB game). Then, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the type (number) of the condition devices to be drawn and the winning probability thereof are different for each RT.

In the present embodiment, the RT transition timing is set when the stop display of the symbol combination or when the RT transition combination is won, that is, when all the reels are stopped (when all reels 31 are stopped). Therefore, for example, when the pattern symbol is stopped when all reels 31 are stopped during RT1, RT shifts from RT1 to RT2 when all reels are stopped. The transition from non-RT, RT1 to RT3 to RT4 may be performed based on the winning of 1BB, or based on the fact that 1BB did not win in the game that won 1BB. May be good. In the present embodiment, the game shifts to RT4 based on the fact that 1BB did not win in the game in which 1BB was won.

Non-internal medium games correspond to non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3. In addition, the internal medium game corresponds to RT4.
Further, during the advantageous section and AT, the slot machine 10 is basically controlled to stay at RT3, but when a player's stop switch 42 is pressed in a wrong order, the player stays at RT2. In some cases. In the case of an advantageous section that ends with only one instruction function operating game (excluding the game in which the small winning combination C group, the replay B group, and the replay C group are won), it is not necessary to stay at RT3. That is, in RT2, one instruction function operation game (excluding the game in which the small winning combination C group, the replay B group, and the replay C group are won) may be performed to end the advantageous section. Of course, you may basically stay at RT3 during the advantageous section. Further, in the advantageous section and during non-AT, in principle, the person may stay at RT3, or may stay at a specific RT, and the RT to stay may not be limited.

In addition, it may be possible to shift to a specific RT (for example, RT3) based on satisfying the transition condition of the advantageous section, and shift to a predetermined RT (for example, non-RT) based on satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section. It may be possible. In the case of such a configuration, when the transition condition of the advantageous section is satisfied and the transition from the next game to the inside is performed, the transition to the internal RT (for example, RT4) is performed instead of the specific RT. Good. Then, if the advantageous section continues even after the bonus ends, the RT after the bonus ends may be RT3.

In the non-RT, RT1 to RT3 non-internal middle games, a lottery of the character condition device is performed. Then, when 1BB is won in these RTs and 1BB is not won, the RT control means 68 determines that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and shifts to RT4 corresponding to the internal middle game.
In addition, when 1BB wins in a game that wins 1BB, the operation of 1BBA or 1BBB starts when the game is completely stopped this time, so in this case, RT4 (internal middle game) is not used.

RT4 will continue until the winning 1BB wins. When the RT control means 68 determines that 1BBA or 1BBB has won a prize in RT4, it determines that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and shifts to 1BBA operation (1BBA game) or 1BBB operation (1BBB game), respectively.
When 1BBA is in operation, it is continued until the operation end condition of 1BBA is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the operation end condition of 1BBA is set so that the number of payouts exceeds 150.

The RT control means 68 determines whether or not more than 150 medals have been paid out during each game and 1BBA operation, and when it is determined that more than 150 medals have been paid out, the termination condition of the 1BBA operation It is determined that the condition is satisfied, and control is performed so that the game shifts to non-RT from the next game.

The same applies to 1BBB operation. If the transition is made during the operation of 1BBB, it is continued until the operation end condition of 1BBB is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the termination condition of the 1BBB operation is set to pay out more than 200 medals.
The RT control means 68 determines whether or not more than 200 medals have been paid out for each game, and if it determines that more than 200 medals have been paid out, it determines that the operation termination condition of 1BBB is satisfied. From the next game, it is controlled to shift to RT1.

Replay is not included in the count of 150 or 200 sheets during 1BB operation. As shown in FIG. 14, while 1BB is in operation, the replay D may be won, but the automatic bet at the time of winning the replay is not counted in the number of payouts. Therefore, the more the replay D is won, the more the number of games during 1BB operation increases. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, the winning probability of the replay D during 1BBA operation is set to 10 times that during 1BBB operation, so that the expected value of the number of games during 1BBA operation is 1BBB operation. It will be more than the expected value of the number of games in.

During the operation of 1BBA and 1BBB, as described above, the RB is continuously operated. The RB ends when either the winning of two wins or the two games is satisfied, and after the end, the RB is operated again on condition that the end condition of the 1BB operation is not satisfied.
Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the winning probability of the small winning combination E2 during the operation of 1BBA is set higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1. When the small winning combination E2 is won and the small winning combination 36 or 38 wins, the number of payouts is two. As a result, the number of games played in setting 6 is larger than that in setting 1 until the end condition (more than 150 cards) is reached during 1BBA operation. Therefore, during the operation of 1BBA in the advantageous section, the expected value of winning the replay D is higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1, so that the probability that the advantageous section is added is higher. Details on this point will be described in the control of the advantageous section described later.

When the RWM53 is initialized, the game is started from non-RT. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and RT may be maintained even when the RWM53 is initialized. Here, for example, when the RWM53 is initialized while the 1BB winning is carried over, the 1BB winning is also maintained (carried over).

In non-RT, the RT control means 68 continues non-RT until the pattern symbol is displayed. In the non-RT, the small winning combination B group is drawn, and if any of the small winning combination B groups is won and the winning small winning combination is missed, the pattern pattern is displayed. When the pattern symbol is displayed in the non-RT, the RT control means 68 determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to RT2 from the next game.
In RT1, as in the case of non-RT, RT1 is maintained until the pattern symbol is displayed. Then, when the pattern symbol is displayed in RT1, the process shifts to RT2.

RT2 is the RT with the highest stay rate in the normal section. In RT2, when the replay B group is won and the replay 02 wins, it is judged that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and the game shifts to RT3 from the next game.
On the other hand, in RT3, it continues until the pattern symbol is displayed or the replay C group is won and the replay 03 wins. When the pattern symbol is displayed or the replay 03 wins in RT3, it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and the game shifts to RT2 from the next game.

As described above, in the normal section (and non-internal), most of them go back and forth between RT2 and RT3, but the probability of staying at RT2 is the highest. When 1BB is won in RT2 and RT3 (including non-RT and RT1), the transition to RT4 (internal) from the next game is as described above.

In addition, in the case where it is decided to shift to the advantageous section during the normal section, if the game decided to shift to the advantageous section is RT3, in order to maintain RT3 (in principle, to RT3 during the advantageous section). (When staying), the instruction function is activated when the replay C group is won, and the correct answer pressing order for winning the replay 01 is displayed. This prevents the vehicle from falling to RT2. In addition, when the small winning combination B group is won, the correct answer pressing order for winning the small winning combination 01 is displayed by activating the instruction function. Similarly, when the small winning combination C group is won, the correct answer pressing order for winning the small winning combination 02 is displayed by activating the instruction function.

On the other hand, when the game decided to shift to the advantageous section is RT2, the correct answer is to activate the instruction function at the time of winning the replay B group while activating the instruction function as described above to win the replay 02. The push order is displayed and controlled to shift to RT3 (when staying at RT3 in principle during the advantageous section).
Further, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when it is non-RT or RT1, it shifts to the advantageous section even during non-RT or RT1, but the instruction function is displayed until the pattern symbol is displayed. In a game in which the operation is possible (for example, when the small winning combination B group is won), the instruction function is not activated and the pattern symbol is displayed. Then, when the pattern symbol is displayed in non-RT or RT1 and the pattern shifts to RT2, the instruction function is operated in the same manner as described above (when staying in RT3 in principle during the advantageous section).

The advantageous section control means 69 is a means for executing transition from a normal section to an advantageous section (including a standby section), determination of whether or not to end the advantageous section, addition in the advantageous section, operation control of an instruction function, and the like. is there.
First, the advantageous section control means 69 determines whether or not to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the non-internal middle game.
Further, the advantageous section control means 69 determines whether or not to add the number of games in the advantageous section in the advantageous section and the non-internal middle game.

Whether or not to shift to the advantageous section during the normal section is determined in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, when the specific condition device is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, at the same time, the advantageous section is selected. Decide to migrate. Further, when deciding to shift to the advantageous section, it is limited to being in the non-internal section, and it is not decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section in the internal section.

Further, as described above, when the transition to the advantageous section is determined according to the winning combination lottery result (winning conditional device), the winning of the conditional device having a setting difference cannot be a condition.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, there is a case where the normal section shifts to the advantageous section on condition that the condition device having common settings is won.

As shown in FIG. 14, for example, when a single BBA is won, there are cases where it is decided to shift to an advantageous section and cases where it is not decided to shift. When a random number value included in the range of the number "20" is extracted from the number "30" assigned to the single winning of 1BBA, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section and the number "10". When the random number value included in the range of is extracted, it is decided not to shift to the advantageous interval. The same applies to the single winning of "1BBA + small winning combination D", "1BBA + small winning combination E1", and small winning combination E1.

Further, when the condition device shown in FIG. 14 is won during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added in each case. In addition, when these condition devices are won, it is possible to perform an additional lottery instead of uniformly adding an advantageous section, or to draw a lottery as to whether or not to perform an additional lottery. However, in the present embodiment, in order to simplify the explanation, the advantageous sections are uniformly added.

When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section, the advantageous section with a predetermined number of games may be set, or the number of games in the advantageous section may be determined by lottery or the like. Alternatively, instead of determining the end condition of the advantageous section by the number of games, the end conditions other than the number of games (for example, the number of payouts, the difference number, the number of winnings of the small winning combination B group, the number of times the instruction function is operated, etc.) may be set. Good. In the present embodiment, when the condition device shown in FIG. 14 is won in the normal section, the section shifts to the advantageous section in which the end conditions are set as described below.
Specifically, for example, the following can be defined.
When 1BBA alone is won (number of positions "20"): Initial value is counted after the end of 1BB game and shifts to the advantageous section of 100 games. Counting after the end of the game and shifting to the advantageous section of 250 games 1BBA + small winning combination E1 duplicate winning (number "20"): Initial value counts after the end of 1BB game and shifts to the advantageous section of 200 games Small When the combination D is won alone (number of placements "50"): Advantageous section of 150 games with an initial value Small role E1 When the single winning combination is won (number of placements "250"): Advantageous section of 100 games with an initial value, or one small combination Any of the advantageous sections ending by the operation of the instruction function at the time of winning the group B (which may be decided by lottery, or included in the range of the number "120" out of the number "250" When the random value is extracted, the initial value is set to the advantageous section of 100 games, and when the random value included in the range of the number "130" is extracted, the instruction function at the time of winning the small winning combination B once. It may be an advantageous section that ends with operation)

Since the winning probability of the small role D is lower than the winning probability of the small role E1, in order to give a premier feeling when the small role D is won, the number of games in the advantageous section when the small role D is won is set to a small number. It is set more than when the role E1 is won. The number of games in the advantageous section when the small winning combination E1 is won may be set to be larger than that when the small winning combination D is won.
Also, when the condition device shown in FIG. 14 is won during the advantageous section, for example, when 1BBA alone is won, the number of games played in the advantageous section is added by "30", and when the small winning combination E1 is won alone (number of positions "250"). ) Adds "50" to the number of games, and "20" is added to the number of games when the small winning combination E1 is won alone (number of places "750"), and so on.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, in the normal section, when the small winning combination E1 is won alone, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section with a probability of "1/4"("250" out of the total number of "1000"). To do.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15, the single winning probability of the small winning combination E2 is set higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1.

Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance ratio of the middle cherry, but the probability that the middle cherry will be determined to shift to the advantageous section when the middle cherry appears is higher in the setting 1 than in the setting 6.
That is, although there is no setting difference in the probability of deciding to shift to the advantageous section, it is possible to give the player the impression that there is a setting difference.
Contrary to the present embodiment, the setting 1 may be higher than the setting 6 for the single winning probability of the small winning combination E2 in FIG.
In this way, the lower the setting, the higher the probability of appearance of the middle cherry, but the lower the probability of being determined to shift to the advantageous section when the middle cherry appears.
In addition, during the advantageous section, when the small winning combination E1 is won alone, the advantageous section is always added. On the other hand, when the small winning combination E2 alone is won in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance ratio of the middle cherry, but the probability that the advantageous section is added when the middle cherry appears is higher in the setting 1 than in the setting 6. Therefore, although there is no setting difference in the probability that the advantageous section is added, it is possible to give the player the impression that there is a setting difference.

Further, 1BBA is a special combination in which the number of winnings is common to the setting (excluding the case where 1BBA and the small combination D are duplicated), and 1BBB is a special combination having a setting difference in the number of winnings.
In this case, when the 1BBA common to the setting is won during the advantageous section and the 1BBA is in operation, the advantageous section can be added during the operation of the 1BBA. On the other hand, when 1BBB having a setting difference during the advantageous section is won and 1BBB is in operation, it is stipulated that the advantageous section cannot be added during the operation of 1BBB. It is stipulated that when 1BBA and small winning combination D, which have a setting difference in the advantageous section, are elected in duplicate and 1BBA is in operation, the advantageous section cannot be added during the operation of 1BBA.

On the other hand, when setting 1 and setting 6 are compared while 1BBA is operating, the winning probability of the small winning combination A is lower in the setting 6 than in the setting 1, and the winning probability of the small winning combination E2 is set in the setting 6. Higher than. Therefore, since the operation end condition of 1BBA is set to pay out more than 150 sheets, the number of games (expected value) during 1BBA operation is larger in setting 6 than in setting 1.
Therefore, for example, if it is set to add an advantageous section when the replay D is won, the expected value of the number of times the replay D is won during the operation of 1BBA is higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1, so the higher the setting, the higher the setting. It is possible to make it easier for advantageous sections to be added.

Further, during the operation of 1BBA, when the number of games reaches a predetermined number, the advantageous section may be added.
As described above, during 1BBA operation, the expected value of the number of games during 1BBA operation is higher in setting 6 than in setting 1.
As described above, the operation termination condition of 1BBA is set that more than 150 sheets have been paid out. On the other hand, the expected value of the number of payouts per game during 1BBA operation is about "8.664" in setting 1 and about "8.557" in setting 6. Therefore, the expected value of the number of games in which the number of payouts reaches 150 is about "17.3" in setting 1 and about "17.5" in setting 6.
Therefore, when the number of games reaches, for example, the 18th game during 1BBA operation, if it is decided to unconditionally add the advantageous section, the higher the set value, the easier it is to add the advantageous section. be able to.
Further, during the operation of 1BBA, it may be set to add an advantageous section every time a certain number of games have elapsed. Even in this way, the higher the set value, the easier it is to add the advantageous section.

On the other hand, since 1BBB is a special role having a setting difference, it is not possible to add an advantageous section while 1BBB is operating.
Further, after the operation of 1BBA is completed, it shifts to non-RT, when it shifts to non-RT, it stays in non-RT until the pattern symbol is displayed, and when the pattern symbol is displayed, it shifts to RT2. That is, it does not go through RT1 after the operation of 1BBA is completed.

On the other hand, after the operation of 1BBB is completed, the process shifts to RT1 and stays in RT1 until the pattern symbol is displayed. In RT1, the replay E is drawn by lottery, and as shown in FIG. 14, if the RT1 is in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added when the replay E is won. As a result, after the end of the 1BBB operation, the probability of adding the advantageous section is higher than that after the end of the 1BBA operation. Then, if the number of additional games in the advantageous section at the time of winning the replay E is set to an appropriate value, it is possible to balance after the end of the 1BBA operation and after the end of the 1BBB operation.

Then, when the advantageous section is maintained and the transition to RT1 is performed, the instruction function is not activated in a game in which the instruction function can be activated (for example, when the small winning combination B group is won) until the pattern symbol is displayed, and the pattern symbol is not activated. Wait until is displayed. Then, when the pattern symbol is displayed in RT1 and the pattern shifts to RT2, the instruction function is activated. When the advantageous section is maintained and the transition to RT1 is performed, the small winning combination 01 wins a prize by activating the instruction function when the small winning combination B group is won, and the pattern (unless there is a mistake in the pushing order). No design is displayed. Therefore, when the user shifts to RT1 during the advantageous section, he / she can continue to stay at RT1 until the advantageous section ends. Not until the end of the advantageous section, but until the predetermined number of games, the instruction function is activated when the small winning combination B group is won, and after the predetermined number of games, the instruction function can be activated until the pattern symbol is displayed. For example, when the small winning combination B group is won), the instruction function may not be activated and the pattern may be waited until the pattern is displayed.

Further, when the advantageous section control means 69 decides to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED (not shown in FIG. 1) is turned on by the time when a predetermined timing arrives. Control is performed so that the advantageous section display LED is turned off when the section is other than the advantageous section (normal section or standby section).
First, when the advantageous section control means 69 decides to shift to the advantageous section, after the end of the game determined to shift to the advantageous section (when all reels 31 are stopped and there is a payout, a medal is awarded. Turn on the advantageous section display LED until the medal insertion (bet) for the next game (after payout) becomes possible, and until the settlement switch 46 can be operated (payment processing operation) when holding a stored medal. To control.

Secondly, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device including the 1BB that can carry over the winning information after the next game, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the 1BB is stopped. The advantageous section display LED is controlled to be turned on.
Therefore, if the transition to the advantageous section is decided based on the winning of the conditional device including the special role, the special role is a special role that carries the winning information to the next game, for example, 1BB, 2BB, and RB. In some cases, the advantageous section display LED may be turned on before the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped (only when a standby section is provided).

On the other hand, if the special role is a special role such as SB or CB that is valid only in the winning game and the winning information is not carried over to the next game, the winning condition device that includes only the small role or replay is selected. Similar to when the transition to the advantageous section is decided based on the above, it is necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 until the medal insertion (bet) of the next game becomes possible and the settlement switch 46 can be operated. is there.

Further, in the game in which the instruction function should be activated in the advantageous section, the advantageous section control means 69 displays the number of acquisitions by operating the instruction function separately from the notification of the correct answer pressing order by the sub control board 80 described later. The push order instruction information is displayed on the LED 78. For example, when the small winning combination B1 is won, the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. This control corresponds to the "operation of the instruction function" in the present embodiment.

It is a game that makes it possible to activate the instruction function during the advantageous section.
1) Non-RT and RT1: When the small winning combination C group is won (When the small winning combination B group is won, the pattern pattern is displayed, so the instruction function does not operate.)
2) RT2: When the replay B group is won, when the small role B group is won, and when the small role C group is won 3) RT3: When the replay C group is won, when the small role B group is won, and when the small role C group is won. ..

In FIG. 1, the external signal transmitting means 70 transmits an external signal to the external centralized terminal plate 100. This external signal is a signal indicating the start and end of the advantageous section, the start and end of AT, the start and end of operation of 1BB, and the like.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control command) necessary for the effect output by the sub control board 80 to the sub control board 80.
The control command includes, for example, a first control command and a second control command. Both the first control command and the second control command are, for example, 8-bit 1-byte data. One control command is a pair of a first control command and a second control command. For example, the first control command may be set in the data indicating the type of the control command, and the second control command may be set in the data indicating the parameter (variable).

For example, in the case of a control command indicating RT, the first control command is "33 (H)" (00110011 (B)) in this embodiment. Further, when the RT parameter is, for example, RT1, it is "00000001 (B)" in the present embodiment. Therefore, the 2-byte data "0010011/00000001"("/" indicates between the first control command and the second control command, which is not actually present), which is a combination of these, is the RT control command. Is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.
As for the push order instruction number (only for the instruction function operation game), the effect group number, and the accessory condition device number, the first control command is the type data and the second control command is all the same as in the above RT. This is the data stored in the RWM 53.

The control command transmitting means 71 does not transmit the winning and replay condition device numbers to the sub control board 80. For example, when the push order bell is won, there is a risk that the correct push order will be known based on the winning and replay condition device numbers due to fraudulent acts. On the other hand, there is no risk of fraudulent activity as described above for the accessory condition device number. Therefore, for example, when 1BBA is won, the accessory condition device number "1" is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

In FIG. 1, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 includes the effect output control means 91.
As described above, the effect output control means 91 is based on the control commands transmitted from the main control board 50, specifically, each control command such as the push order instruction number, the effect group number, and the accessory condition device number. Then, at what timing (when the start switch 41 is operated, when each stop switch 42 is operated, etc.), what kind of effect is output (how the lamp 21 is turned on, blinks or turned off, the speaker 22 What kind of sound is output from the image, what kind of image is displayed on the image display device 23, etc.) and other specific production contents are determined by lottery.

Then, the effect output control means 91 controls the output of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 according to the determination. In addition, during 1BB operation or in an advantageous section, the number of acquired cards, the number of games played (the number of remaining games or the number of digested games), and the like are displayed as images. Further, in the advantageous section, when the instruction function is activated, the correct answer pressing order is notified (image display). For example, when a small winning combination B1 is won in a game in an advantageous section and a control command corresponding to a push order instruction number is received, the correct push order is "left first stop" or "1- ○-○". And so on, the content that the player can easily know the correct answer pressing order is notified.

Furthermore, it can be said that the control command of the effect group number does not include information on which condition device was actually won, but includes rough winning information. For example, when a control command corresponding to an effect group number indicating that one of the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, or the small winning combination C group has been won is received, the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, or the small winning combination It is not possible for the sub-control board 80 side to know which of the C groups was won. However, it is possible to know whether the player has won the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, or the small winning combination C group. Therefore, it is possible to display an effect such as displaying a "bell" pattern or turning on a frame lamp in "yellow", which is the corresponding color of "bell".

Subsequently, the LED of this embodiment will be described.
FIG. 16 is a plan view showing the stored number display LED76, the acquired number display LED78, and the status display LED79 in more detail.
Further, in FIG. 16, a display board 75 (indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 3) is arranged inside the slot machine 10 below the stored number display LED 76, the acquired number display LED 78, and the status display LED 79.

The stored number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals stored inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of a digit 1 that displays the upper digit and a digit 2 that displays the lower digit. That is, the stored number display LED 76 displays two digits.
Here, the "digit" means a display unit (display), and in particular, in the present embodiment, it is composed of a seven-segment display (seven-segment display unit, so-called 7-segment display).
As shown in FIG. 16, the number of digits mounted on the display board 75 is four, that is, digits 1 to 4, but in the present embodiment, there are five digits, and the other digit 5 is the main digit. It corresponds to the set value display LED 73 (FIG. 1) provided on the control board 50.

The stored number display LED 76 displays the number of stored medals, and in the present embodiment, displays a number between "00" and "50" (integer).
For example, in a state where no medals are bet and stored, the display of the stored number display LED76 is "00". In this case, the display is not limited to "00", and may be "* 0" or "**" (where "*" indicates extinguishing).
Here, when one medal is cared for, the one medal is bet for the game. If two more medals are added, three medals will be bet for the game (when the bet limit is three). Therefore, when the number of medals maintained is up to three, the medals are bet and are not stored. When the medals are further maintained, the medals are stored inside the slot machine 10, and the number of stored medals is displayed by the stored number display LED 76.

In this embodiment, up to 50 medals can be stored. Therefore, when the number of stored medals reaches 50 (when "50" is displayed on the stored number display LED 76), no more medals are stored. In this state, if a medal is maintained from the medal slot 43, the blocked medal is returned from the payout slot by the blocker 45.

Here, when a winning combination (excluding replay) with a medal payout wins and a medal corresponding to that role is paid out, priority is given to the actual payout of the medal from the payout port, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is used. The medals are stored. For example, when the number of stored cards before winning a winning combination is "10" and the winning number of 9 cards is won, the display of the storage number display LED 76 is updated from "10" to "19".

Furthermore, when the number of stored cards exceeds "50" at the time of winning the winning combination, the amount exceeding "50" is actually paid out from the payout slot. For example, when the number of medals stored is "47" before the winning combination and 9 medals are paid out by winning the winning combination of 9 medals, 3 medals are stored and the number of stored medals becomes "50", which exceeds "50". Six cards will be paid out from the payout slot.

Further, when the replay is won, the medals are not stored or paid out, and the number of medals bet in the game is automatically bet for the replay. For example, when the game is played with 3 bets (3 cards) and the replay wins, 3 medals are automatically bet. Then, since the automatic bet based on the winning of the replay is the insertion of a medal for performing the replay, the medal cannot be settled even if the settlement (return) operation is performed after that.

In addition, according to the "Rules for Approval of Game Machines and Type Approval, etc.", when the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay stops at the effective line, it is the operation of the condition device related to the replay, not the "winning". It has been interpreted. However, in the present application (the present specification, etc.), the replay is also treated as one of the roles (replay role), and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the replay stops at the effective line, which is referred to as "replay winning".

Further, the acquisition number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the number of payouts (the number of acquisitions of the player) when the winning combination is won, and is composed of a digit 3 that displays the upper digit and a digit 4 that displays the lower digit. There is. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 displays two digits in the same manner as the stored number display LED 76.
The display of the acquired number display LED78 is "00" when there are no medals to be paid out, but for example, when the 9-card combination described later wins and 9 medals are paid out, the display of the acquired number display LED78 is It changes from "00" to "09".
The acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to turn off when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit (digit 3) may be turned off and only the lower digit (digit 4) may be displayed as "0".

Further, the acquired number display LED 78 normally displays the acquired number, but functions as an LED for displaying the content (type) of the error when an error occurs.
Furthermore, the acquired number display LED 78 functions as an LED for displaying push order instruction information in the instruction function operation game. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 in the present embodiment is an LED that also displays the acquired number, the error content, and the push order instruction information. The advantageous push order notification is also executed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 16, digits 1 to 4 are used as a 7-segment display with dots (DP; decimal points), and digit 2 (lower digit of stored number display LED 76) or digit 4 (acquired number display LED 78). ) Can be used as the above-mentioned advantageous section display LED.

In FIG. 16, the status display LED 79 is composed of seven LEDs (79a to 79 g).
The 1-bet, 2-bet, and 3-bet display LEDs 79a to 79c are LEDs that display the number of medals bet, respectively, and when one medal is bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a lights up and two are bet. When the medal is bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a and the 2-bet display LED 79b are lit. Further, when three medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b and the 3-bet display LED 79c are lit.

The game start LED 79d is an LED that lights up when a medal is inserted and the start switch 41 is in an operable state. Therefore, it does not light up when the medal is not bet (or the replay is not automatically inserted).
The insertion display LED 79e is an LED that lights up when a medal can be inserted. That is, it lights up before the game is completed and the medal for shifting to the next game is inserted, indicating a so-called bet waiting state. In this embodiment, even after the replay is activated, the light is turned on when betting is possible according to the number of stored sheets (for example, when the number of stored numbers is less than "50").

The replay display LED 79f is an LED that lights up when the replay wins, and a predetermined timing after the replay wins (for example, before the automatic bet based on the replay winning or the automatic betting based on the replay winning is performed). Later), the replay display LED 79f lights up to notify the player that the automatic betting state is in effect.
In the present embodiment, the effect display LED 79g is an LED that lights up during the settlement process. When the checkout switch 46 is turned on with the stored medal and / or the bet medal (excluding the automatic bet at the time of replay winning), it lights up while the medal is actually paid out.

FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating details of digits and segments.
Each digit is composed of segments A to P (8 in total), and segments A to G (7) of them constitute a so-called 7-segment display. Further, the segment P constitutes any one of the status display LEDs 79 (however, the digit 2 is excluded).
As shown in FIG. 17, for example, the segment P of the digit 1 constitutes the game start LED 79d. Further, the segment P of the digit 3 constitutes the closing display LED 79e. Furthermore, the segment P of the digit 4 constitutes the replay display LED 79f.

Although detailed description is omitted, digits 1 to 5 are dynamically lit for each interrupt process. For example, in a certain interrupt process, only digit 1 can be turned on, and digits 2 to 5 are turned off. Then, in the next interrupt process, only digit 2 can be turned on, and digits 1, 3 to 5 are turned off. Therefore, each digit can be lit once every five interrupts.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing input ports 0 to 2 provided on the main control board 60. 19 and 20 are diagrams showing output ports 0 to 3 and 4 to 7 provided on the main control board 60. Although the slot machine 10 is actually provided with other input ports and output ports, it is not shown because it is not directly related to the present embodiment.
The input ports 0 to 2 and the output ports 0 to 7 of the present embodiment are 1-byte ports capable of inputting or outputting 8 bits of D0 to D7. Similarly, other input ports and output ports (not shown) are 1-byte ports capable of outputting 8-bit data of D0 to D7.

Further, in FIGS. 18 to 20, the port indicated as unused means a signal input / output port that is not actually used or whose description is omitted in the present embodiment (port without signal input / output). Does not mean that they are all unused).

In FIG. 18, each signal of the settlement switch 46, the bet switch 40 (1 bet switch 40a and the 3 bet switch 40b), the start switch 41, and the stop switch 42, which are operation switches, is input to the input port 0. In the example of FIG. 18, the 1-bet switch signal (D1 bit) and the 3-bet switch signal (D2 bit) are separated, but when the slot machine 10 has a specification in which only the 3-bet switch 40 is provided, The D1 bit of input port 0 is unused.

Further, signals of the passage sensor 43a, the door switch 15, the setting switch 13, the setting key switch 12, the reset switch 14, and the (left, middle, right) reel sensor 33 are input to the input port 1.
Furthermore, the input port 2 has a power failure signal (a signal output when a power failure occurs), input sensors 1 (44a) and 2 (44b) signals, and payout sensors 1 (37a) and 2 (37b). ) Signal is input.

Then, as will be described later, as information processing for advancing the game, a main process (also referred to as a main loop) performed once per game is provided. In the main process, the inserted medals are detected, and the winning process after all reels 31 are stopped is performed. The program start process (FIG. 32) and the power supply return process (FIG. 33), which will be described later, may also be referred to as a main process.

During this main process, the main process is temporarily exited, and the interrupt process (timer interrupt process) described later is executed. Then, in the interrupt processing, processing for detecting input ports 0 to 2 and the like are executed, and after executing these processing, processing for returning to the main processing is periodically performed. The interval of the interrupt time is 2.235 ms in this embodiment. That is, the data of the input ports 0 to 2 is acquired for each interrupt process at 2.235 ms intervals.

Then, based on the acquired data, for each of the input ports 0 to 2, the level data (data indicating on / off of each bit) and the rising data of the input port (the previous interrupt was off and the current interrupt is on). Generates data indicating which bit the data has become (data indicating which bit the data has become) and data indicating the falling edge of the input port (data indicating which bit the data was turned on at the time of the previous interrupt and turned off at the time of the interrupt this time). And remember. Therefore, these data are updated every 2.235 ms.

Further, all of the D0 to D7 bits of the input ports 0 to 2 are detected regardless of when the interrupt processing is performed. For example, while the reel 31 is rotating (before the stop switch 42 is operated), the bet switch 40 cannot be operated by the player, so the data of the D1 and D2 bits of the input port 0 is not necessarily acquired. Although it is not necessary, in the present invention, data of all bits is acquired. Then, if the data of all the bits is acquired, it is possible to perform an error determination. For example, there is a case where the rising data of the bet switch 40 is turned on while the reel 31 is rotating.
Further, for example, by acquiring 1-byte data (8 bits) of the input port 0, it is possible to know the on / off status of all the operation switches.

In FIG. 19, at the output port 0, each φ0 to φ3 signal of the motor 32 of the left reel 31 is output from the D0 to D3 bits. The motor 32 of the present embodiment is configured to rotate the reel 31 by 1-2 phase excitation, and drives the reel 31 by a combination of 4-phase excitation of φ0 to φ3, so that each phase is driven. Signals are output from predetermined bits.

Further, the signal of the blocker 45 is output from the D6 bit. Furthermore, the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is output from the D7 bit.
Here, the blocker 45 forms a medal passage connecting the medal insertion slot 43 and the hopper 35 when the blocker signal is "1" (on), and when it is "0" (off), the blocker 45 forms a medal passage. A passage (return passage) connecting the medal insertion port 43 and the payout port is formed.
Then, for example, when the blocker 45 is driven, a blocker signal is output from the D6 bit of the output port 0 by interrupt processing.

From the D0 to D3 bits of the output port 1, each φ0 to φ3 signal of the motor 32 of the middle reel 31 is output. Similarly, from the D4 to D7 bits, each φ0 to φ3 signal of the motor 32 of the right reel 31 is output.
Further, signals for lighting the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, and the 2-bet display LED 79c in the status display LED 79 are output from the D0 to D2 bits of the output port 2, respectively. Further, digit 1 signal to digit 5 signal are output from the D3 to D7 bits, respectively. These digit signals are signals for turning on / off the stored number display LED76, the acquired number display LED78, the status display LED79, and the set value display LED73.

Further, the segment A signal to the segment P signal are output from the D0 to D7 bits of the output port 3, respectively. These segment signals are signals for lighting each segment (element) shown in FIG.
To specifically explain the digit signal and the segment signal, for example, when the data of the output port 2 is "10000000 (B)", only the digit 5 is turned on, so only the set value display LED 73 is turned on. Further, when the data of the output port 3 is "00111111 (B)", the signals of the segments A to F are turned on (the signal of the segment G is off), so that "0" is displayed on the digit 5.
As described above, D3 to D7 of the output port 2 determine which digit is lit, and the output port 3 determines which segment is lit.

In FIG. 20, an external (outer end) signal is output from the output port 4 to the external centralized terminal plate 100, and in the present embodiment, external signals 1 to 5, a medal insertion signal, and a medal payout signal are output. ..
Here, the "external signal" is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (such as a hall computer or a data counter installed in the hall) via the external centralized terminal plate 100 as described above. is there. In the present embodiment, an external signal 5 indicating that the door switch 15 of the slot machine 10 is turned on (opening of the front door), an external signal 4 indicating that an error or power failure has occurred in the slot machine 10, and an advantageous section. External signals 1 to 3 indicating start and end, AT start and end, 1BB operation start and end are provided. How to determine the external signals 1 to 3 is arbitrary. For example, the external signal 1 can be defined as a signal during the stay of a specific RT.
Furthermore, a medal bet signal is output from the D6 bit, and a medal payout signal is output from the D7 bit.

Output ports 5 and 6 are ports that output sub-control data signals (control commands transmitted to the sub-control board 80). The output port 5 outputs the sub-control data signals 1 to 8, and the output port 6 outputs the sub-control data signals 9 to 16.
Further, the output port 7 is set as a port for transmitting a test signal to the testing machine. Here, the "test signal" means that the slot machine 10 (game machine) is connected to the testing machine, and a predetermined signal is transmitted from the slot machine 10 to the testing machine so that the slot machine 10 can perform the "game machine". It is a signal used to confirm whether it is designed in accordance with the "Rules for Certification and Type Verification, etc." The connection between the slot machine 10 and the testing machine is not limited to the direct connection, but may be connected via an interface board for relaying.

Then, the condition devices 1 to 8 signals are assigned to the output port 7. Here, the "conditional device" indicates a so-called winning number (type of winning), and in the present embodiment, D6 and D7 bits indicate whether or not a bonus (special combination) has been won, and D0 to D5 bits indicate whether or not a bonus (special combination) has been won. Shows the type of winning. By using the D0 to D5 bits, 64 types of winning patterns can be output. By outputting a signal from the output port 7, it is possible to notify the outside which condition device is on (which winning) in the game.
It is desirable that the electronic component (IC) for outputting the test signal from the output port 7 is not mounted when the slot machine 10 is installed in the game store (market). However, the slot machine 10 is installed in the game store in a state where the program for outputting the test signal from the output port 7 is stored in the ROM 54 mounted on the main control board 50. In other words, the slot machine 10 installed in the market is configured so that although the program processing for transmitting the test signal is executed, the test signal by the program processing is not output.

21 to 31 are diagrams showing the addresses (storage addresses) of the data stored in the RWM 53 and their contents. The data shown in FIGS. 21 to 31 are data for use in the description of the present embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 53 is not limited to these data.
In FIG. 21, the input port level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) of the address “F008 (H)” is an area for storing the level data of the input port 0. For each interrupt process, the input signal from the input port 0 is read, a predetermined operation is executed, and then the data is stored (updated) in the storage area.
The input port 0 rising data (_PT_IN0_UP) of the address "F009 (H)" is an area for storing the rising data of the input port 0. It is calculated every time the input port 0 level data is updated, and the input port 0 rising data is also updated.
The “rising” is a signal indicating that the previous interrupt was off (“0”) and the current interrupt was on (“1”). Therefore, when the previous interrupt is on (“1”) and the current interrupt is also on (“1”), the rising data is “0”.

In FIG. 22, the input port 1 level data (_PT_IN1_OLD) at the address “F00A (H)” is an area for storing the level data of the input port 1. For each interrupt process, the input signal from the input port 1 is read, a predetermined operation is executed, and then the data is stored (updated) in the storage area.
The input port 1 rising data (_PT_IN1_UP) at the address "F00B (H)" is an area for storing the rising data of the input port 1. It is calculated every time the input port 1 level data is updated, and the input port 1 rising data is also updated.

In FIG. 23, the input port 1 falling data (_PT_IN1_DOWN) at the address “F00C (H)” is an area for storing the falling data of the input port 1. It is calculated every time the input port 1 level data is updated, and the input port 1 falling data is also updated.
The "falling edge" is a signal indicating that the previous interrupt was on ("1") and the current interrupt was off ("0"). Therefore, when the previous interrupt is off (“0”) and the current interrupt is also off (“0”), the falling data is “0”.
The input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) at the address "F00D (H)" is an area for storing the level data of the input port 2. The input signal from the input port 2 is read for each interrupt process, calculated as described above, and then the data is updated.

In FIG. 24, the specific information flag (_FL_ERROR_INF) of the address “F00F (H)” is an area for storing the data of the specific information flag. Here, in the present embodiment, the specific information flags are the door switch information (D1), the setting switch information (D2), the setting key switch information (D3), the reset switch information (D4), and the transmission bit (D6) when the power is turned off and restored. ).
The door switch (15) information (D1), setting switch (13) information (D2), setting key switch (12) information (D3), and reset switch (14) information (D4) are input port 1 level data. Corresponds to a bit. Then, for example, when the on of the door switch 15 is detected, the D1 bit of the input port 1 level data is turned on (“1”), and at the same time, the D1 bit of the specific information flag is turned on (“1”). ). The same applies to the setting key switch information (D3) and the reset switch information (D4).

Further, the D6 bit "transmission bit when the power is restored" is a flag that is turned on ("1") until a predetermined time elapses after detecting the restoration from the power failure. The specific information flag is in one flag (in one byte data) in order to simultaneously determine whether or not a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned off and the switch on / off status related to the above setting change. I remember this information. Therefore, by accessing the specific information flag and determining the on / off of each bit, it is possible to simultaneously determine the on / off of the switch related to the setting change and whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after returning from the power failure. Become.

The abnormal input flag (_FL_IN_ABNML) of the address "F010 (H)" is an area for storing the data of the abnormal input flag. In the present embodiment, the data of the D4 to D6 bits are the data when the passage sensor 43a has an abnormal stay, when the input sensor 2 (44b) has an abnormal input, and when the payout sensor 37 has an abnormal input. Turns on.

In FIG. 25, the medal management flag (_FL_MEDAL_STS) of the address “F011 (H)” is mainly an area for storing a flag for controlling lighting / extinguishing of the status display LED 79. In the medal management flag, the D0 bit indicates the start switch 41 acceptance state, and when the operation of the start switch 41 is being accepted, that is, when the start switch 41 can be operated (for example, the state before the medal is bet and the game is started). ) Is set to "1", and when the operation of the start switch 41 cannot be accepted (for example, while the reel 31 is rotating), it is set to "0".

The blocker state of the D2 bit is data that is set to "1" when the blocker 45 is on and "0" when the blocker 45 is off. By determining the value of the D2 bit, it is possible to determine what state the current blocker 45 is in (on or off).
The D3-bit replay display LED (79f) is data that is set to "1" when the replay is displayed and medals are automatically inserted as a replay. When this data is "1", the replay display LED 79f of the above-mentioned status display LEDs 79 lights up. Further, it is the data to be set to "0" when the game by the re-game is completed. When this data is "0", the replay display LED 79f is turned off.

The D4 bit effect display LED (79 g) is data that is set to "1" when the settlement switch 46 is operated to settle the bet medal and / or the stored medal. When this data is "1", the effect display LED 79g of the above-mentioned state display LEDs 79 is lit. In addition, the data is set to "0" when the settlement of the medal to be settled is completed.

In the present embodiment, for example, when the checkout switch is operated in a situation where a bet medal is held (“1” or more) and a stored medal is held (“1” or more) when the replay does not win a prize. , The bet medal is set as the settlement target, and the effect display LED 79g is formed to light up when the bet medal is being settled, but the bet medal and the stored medal are formed to be settled at once. If so, it is preferable that the bet medal or the stored medal is formed so as to be set to "1" (so that the effect display LED 79 g is lit) when the settlement is made. As described above, when a bet medal is held by automatic bet processing by replay, the bet medal is not subject to settlement. In other words, after the replay wins, if the checkout switch is operated in a situation where the bet medal is held and the stored medal is not held, the checkout of the medal is not executed.

The D6 bit setting non-changeable flag is data that becomes "0" when the setting can be changed, and becomes "1" in other cases. In the present embodiment, the data is set to "1" when the start switch 41 is operated and the game is advanced, and is set to "0" when the medal acceptance of the next game is started. .. When changing the setting, the value of the setting change permission flag is referred to, and when the setting change impossibility flag is "1", the setting change is not permitted. However, even if the setting change impossibility flag is "1", if it is determined that an unrecoverable error (for example, random number update error determined for each interrupt process) is determined, the setting change is permitted and the setting change Based on this, it is possible to cancel the unrecoverable error.

The D7-bit medal limit setting determination is data that is "1" when the number of bet medals has reached the medal limit number (specified number) and is "0" when the number of bet medals has not reached the medal limit number. In the present embodiment, the limit number (specified number) is set to 3 during the normal game and 2 during the 1BB game. Therefore, for example, in a normal game, when the number of bet medals is 0, 1, or 2, the number of medals has not reached the limit number of medals, so it becomes "0", and when the number of medals is 3, the number of medals has reached the limit number. It becomes "1".

The bet number display LED data (_PT_MEDAL_LED) of the address "F012 (H)" is an area for storing the bet number display LED data, and 1 bet to 3 bet display LEDs 79a to 79c are assigned to the D0 to D2 bits, respectively. ing. For example, when only the D0 bit is "1", only the 1-bet display LED 79a is controlled to light up. Further, when the D1 and D2 bits are "1", the 1-bet display LED 79a and the 2-bet display LED 79b are controlled to light up.

In FIG. 26, the operating state flag (_FL_ACTION) of the address “F014 (H)” is an area for storing the data of the operating state flag. In the present embodiment, the D0 bit is replayed, the D3 bit is 1BB, and D4. RB is assigned to the bit.
For example, when the replay wins a prize, the replay is in the operating state, and when the game state is set (for example, when “Yes” is set in step S91 of FIG. 35 described later), the D0 bit is set to “1”. .. The D0 bit is changed from "1" to "0" when the replay game is completed.
Further, when 1BBA or 1BBB wins, the 1BB is in the operating state and the RB is in the operating state, and when the gaming state is set (for example, step S88 in FIG. 35 described later), the D3 bit and the D4 bit are set. It becomes "1". Then, when the end condition of 1BBA or 1BBB is satisfied, the D3 bit and the D4 bit become "0".
Although not provided in the present embodiment, for example, when 2BB or CB is provided, it may be assigned to an empty bit of the operating state flag (for example, 2BB to the D1 bit and CB to the D2 bit).

The symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN) of the address "F015 (H)" is an area for storing the symbol combination display flag, and in the present embodiment, replay is assigned to the D0 bit and 1BB is assigned to the D3 bit. For example, when it is determined that the replay symbol has stopped (when a prize is won), the D0 bit is set to "1". Then, this bit is changed from "1" to "0" when the start switch 41 of the next game is operated.
Further, although not provided in this embodiment, when 2BB, CB, and (single winning) RB are provided, for example, D1 bit is set to 2BB, D2 bit is set to CB, D4 bit so as to correspond to the operating state flag. Allocating RB can be mentioned.

In FIG. 27, the automatic bet (insertion) number data (_NB_REP_MEDAL) of the address “F06A (H)” is an area for storing the automatic bet (insertion) number data (data indicating the number of medals to be automatically bet at the time of replay winning). In this embodiment, "2" or "3" is stored.
The medal bet (insertion) number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) of the address "F06B (H)" is an area for storing the medal bet number data, and in the present embodiment, any one of "0" to "3" is used. It will be remembered.
The medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the address “F06C (H)” is an area for storing the medal payout number data, and in the present embodiment, any of the values “0” to “10” is stored. To. In the present embodiment, since the maximum number of medals to be paid out in one game is 10, the maximum value of the medal payout number data is "10". However, for example, when a 15-card payout combination is provided, the medal payout number data is "0" to "15".

The medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) of the address "F06D (H)" is an area for storing the medal payout number data, and in the present embodiment, it is the same as the medal payout number data of the address "F06C (H)". , Any of the values "0" to "10" is stored.
In the present embodiment, when the winning combination is determined, the values of both the medal payout number data of the address "F06C (H)" and the medal payout number data buffer of the address "F06D (H)" are updated. .. At the time of this update, the same value is stored in both addresses. Then, the medal payout number data of the address "F06C (H)" is subtracted for each medal payout, and becomes "0" at the end of the medal payout. On the other hand, the value of the medal payout number data buffer at the address "F06D (H)" is maintained without being updated depending on the medal payout. The stored value is maintained until the value is updated at the end of the next game.

The medal payout number data buffer is provided to determine whether or not a small winning combination has won a prize during the 1BB game. For example, in a 1BB game, the RB operates continuously, but as a condition for ending the RB, it is defined as two games or two small wins. At this time, when determining the winning of two small wins, which is the end condition of RB, it is necessary to judge whether or not the small win has won. Here, when the medal payout number data of the address "F06C (H)" is referred to, the payout is completed even if the small winning combination is won, and "0" may be stored in the address. Although there is a possibility, the address "F06D (H)" is provided so that it can be grasped that a small winning combination has occurred regardless of whether or not the payout has been completed. In the present embodiment, the medal payout number data is stored, but "0" may be stored when the small winning combination does not win, and "1" may be stored when the small winning combination wins.

The acquired number data (_NB_PAYOUT) of the address "F06E (H)" is an area for storing the acquired number data. When a small win is won and a medal is paid out, the number of medals to be paid out is stored in this acquired number data. Then, based on this data, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is controlled. For example, when the acquired number data is "1", this data "1" is read and "01" is displayed on the acquired number display LEDs 78 (digits 3 and 4).

Here, in the medal payout number data of the above-mentioned address "F06C (H)", for example, "9" is stored when the 9-card combination wins, and when the medal is paid out (including addition to the stored number), It is a counter that is decremented according to the number of payouts, such as "9"->"8"->"7"->...->"0".
On the other hand, the acquired number data of the address "F06E (H)" is, for example, "1"->"2"->"3"->...->"9" when the 9-card combination wins. It is a counter that is added according to the payout of medals.
Therefore, the display by the acquired number display LED 78 is performed using the acquired number data.

The stored number display data (_NB_CREDIT) of the address "F06F (H)" is an area for storing the stored number display data, and the data for displaying the stored number at that time is displayed on the above-mentioned stored number display LED 76. I remember.
Here, in the present embodiment, the data itself is a decimal number value (H), but a value obtained by converting the number of stored sheets into a decimal number is stored. For example, when the number of stored sheets to be displayed is "29", the value "29 (H)" is stored. In other words, "00101001 (B)" is stored in the address "F06F (H)". As a result, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 of the address "F06F (H)" are used to display the lower digit of the number of stored sheets ("9" in this example), and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are used. It is stored as data for displaying the upper digit (“2” in this example) of the number of stored sheets. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of stored sheets is "50", so the stored data value is in the range of "0" to "50".

In the present embodiment, the address of the RWM 53 that stores the stored number data itself is not provided, and the stored number display data is provided as the display data of the stored number display LED 76. However, the stored number display data is the stored number data itself.

The medal bet (insertion) signal output count (also referred to as the medal bet (insertion) signal switching count) (_CT_MEDAL_IN) of the address "F070 (H)" is a storage area for the medal bet (insertion) signal output count, and is "0". ~ The value of "6" is stored. In the present embodiment, the number of times the medal bet signal is output indicates the number of times the medal bet number is output to the outside as a signal, and the number of times the bet number is doubled is output. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of bets is "3", so the maximum number of medal bet signal outputs is "6". For example, when outputting the number of bets "3", "on (1st time)-> off (2nd time)-> on (3rd time)-> off (4th time)-> on (5th time)-> off (6th time)" Become.

The medal payout signal output count (also referred to as the medal payout signal switching count) (_CT_MEDAL_OUT) of the address "F071 (H)" is an area for storing data of the medal payout signal output count, and is "0" to "20". The value of is stored. The number of times the medal payout signal is output indicates the number of times the medal payout number is output to the outside as a signal, and the number of times the number of payouts is doubled is output. This point is the same as the number of times the medal bet signal is output. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of payouts is "10", so the maximum value of the number of medal payout signal outputs is "20". As described above, when the maximum value of the number of payouts is set to, for example, "15", the maximum value of the number of times the medal payout signal is output is "30".

In FIG. 28, the interrupt counter (_CT_INTR) of the addresses “F081 (H)” and “F082 (H)” is an area for storing the interrupt counter. The value of the interrupt counter is an increment counter having a range of "0" to "65535 (D)", and the value is updated ("+1") for each interrupt. In this embodiment, since "0" to "65535 (D)" are adopted as the values of the interrupt counter, the 2-byte addresses "F081 (H)" (lower 8 bits) and "F082 (H)" ( The upper 8 bits) are used. For example, when the range of "0" to "255 (D)" is adopted, only the 1-byte address "F081 (H)" is used.

The winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) of the address "F083 (H)" is an area for storing the winning and replay condition device number, and after the lottery of the condition device is performed, the storage area is won. The value corresponding to the winning and replay condition device is stored. The value stored here is used for selection of a stop position determination table used for stop control of the reel 31, an advantageous section, an AT lottery (and addition), selection of an effect group number, and the like.
In the present embodiment, the winning (small winning combination) and replay condition device numbers "0" to "30 (D)", which are condition devices that do not carry over the winning information to the next game, and the condition device that allows the winning information to be carried over to the next game. The accessory condition device numbers "1" and "2 (D)" are provided. The storage area of the winning and replay condition device number of the address "F083 (H)" is the storage area of the condition device that does not carry over the winning information to the next game.

On the other hand, the accessory condition device number (_NB_CND_BNS) of the address "F040 (H)" is an area for storing the accessory condition device number that can carry over the winning information, and in the present embodiment, the accessory condition device number is not won. "0" is stored when the time is won, "1" is stored when the 1BBA is won, and "2 (D)" is stored when the 1BBB is won.
Similar to the above, this value is also used for selecting the stop position determination table used for the stop control of the reel 31, the advantageous section, the AT lottery (addition), the selection of the effect group number, and the like.
The above-mentioned conditional device number is also referred to as a winning number.

The push order instruction number (_NB_ORD_INF) of the address "F085 (H)" is an area for storing the push order instruction number. In the present embodiment, a push order favorable to the player is assigned to each winning (winning and replay) condition device (including both a case where the push order is favorable to the player and a case where the push order is not favorable to the player). ), When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the push order instruction number corresponding to the winning condition device is acquired and stored in this address.
It should be noted that "when a predetermined condition is satisfied" is when the push order is instructed (in the instruction function operating game). Therefore, in the push order instruction state, the push order instruction number is acquired and stored in the RWM 53, but in the push order instruction state, the push order instruction number is not acquired or stored in the RWM 53.

The effect group number (_NB_ACT_GRP) of the address "F086 (H)" is an area for storing the effect group number. In the present embodiment, when the lottery of the conditional device is performed, the effect group number corresponding to the winning conditional device is selected and stored in this address.
The left reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) of the address "F08A (H)" is an area for storing the symbol number passing through the middle stage (see FIG. 3), and is accompanied by rotation of the reel 31. Then, every time the symbol number passing through the middle stage is updated, the data in this storage area is also updated. For example, when the number 10 "bell B" in FIG. 2 is located in the middle of the left reel 31, "10 (D)" is stored in this storage area. Further, the actual symbol number is stored in this storage area after the rotation of the reel 31 starts (after the rotation speed of the reel 31 reaches a constant speed) and after the detection by the reel sensor 33. Before the reel 31 is detected by the reel sensor 33, "FF (H)" is stored as an initial value.

The left reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL1_STPPIC) of the address "F08B (H)" is an area for storing the symbol number to be stopped in the middle stage. When the stop switch 42 is operated and the stop position is determined from the position of the condition device and the reel 31 that are won in the game, the symbol number to be stopped in the middle stage is stored in this storage area. If the symbol number to be stopped has not yet been determined, "FF (H)" is stored.

The middle reel symbol number (for the passing position) of the address "F08C (H)" and the middle reel symbol number (for the stop position) of the "F08D (H)" are the addresses "F08A (H)" for the left reel 31, respectively. ) ”Left reel symbol number (for passing position) and“ F08B (H) ”left reel symbol number (for stop position) (for middle reel 31). The data stored in these storage areas is the same as the addresses "F08A (H)" and "F08B (H)", respectively, except that the data is for the middle reel 31.
Further, the right reel symbol number (for the passing position) of the address "F08E (H)" and the right reel symbol number (for the stop position) of the "F08F (H)" are the addresses "F08A" for the left reel 31, respectively. It corresponds to the left reel symbol number (for the passing position) of "(H)" and the left reel symbol number (for the stop position) of "F08B (H)" (for the right reel 31). The data stored in these storage areas is the same as the addresses "F08A (H)" and "F08B (H)", respectively, except that the data is for the right reel 31.

In FIG. 29, the winning and replay condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_N) at the address “F091 (H)” is an area for storing the winning and replay condition device information. The data of this address is a storage area for storing information to be generated based on the winning and replay condition device number of the address "F083 (H)" and transmitted to the testing machine. In this winning and replay condition device information, the information is generated so that the D6 bit is always "1", and the D0 to D5 bits are values corresponding to the winning condition device ("0" in this embodiment). ~ "Any of" 30 (D) ") is stored. For example, when "00000001 (B)" is stored in the address "F083 (H)" (when Replay A is won in this embodiment), "01000001 (B)" is stored in the address "F091 (H)". It will be remembered. Further, when "00000000 (B)" is stored in the address "F083 (H)" (when the winning condition device number "0", that is, when not winning), the address "F091 (H)" is " 01000000 (B) ”is stored.

Further, the accessory condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_B) at the address "F092 (H)" is an area for storing the accessory condition device information, and the winning condition device can be used depending on whether or not 1BBA and 1BBB are won. The corresponding number is stored. The data of this address is a storage area for storing information to be transmitted to the testing machine, which is generated based on the value of the accessory condition device number of the address "F084 (H)". In this accessory condition device information, the information is generated so that the D7 bit is always "1", and the D0 bit is set to "0" when 1BB is not won, and D0 when 1BBA is won or when 1BBA is inside. The bit is set to "1". For example, when "00000001 (B)" is stored in the address "F084 (H)" (in this embodiment, when 1BBA is won), "10000001 (B)" is stored in the address "F092 (H)". Be remembered.
Similarly, when "00000010 (B)" is stored in the address "F084 (H)" (when 1BBB is won), "10000010 (B)" is stored in the address "F092 (H)". ..
Furthermore, when "0000000 (B)" is stored in the address "F084 (H)" (when 1BB is not won), "10000000 (B)" is stored in the address "F092 (H)". To.
The above-mentioned conditional device information is also referred to as winning information.

In FIG. 30, the blocker signal and hopper motor drive signal data (_PT_BLK_HPM) at the address “F093 (H)” are areas for storing the data of the blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal, and are D6 bits as the blocker signal and D7 bits are used as the hopper motor drive signal (D0 to D5 bits are unused). When the blocker 45 is turned on, the D6 bit is set to "1", and when the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the D7 bit is set to "1". More specifically, the address "F093 (H)" is updated in the main processing, the data of the output port 0 is generated based on the data of the address "F093 (H)" in the interrupt processing, and the blocker 45 and the hopper It controls the motor 36.

The medal signal data (_PT_MEDAL_IO) of the address “F094 (H)” is an area for storing the medal signal data, and a medal bet signal is assigned to the D6 bit and a medal payout signal is assigned to the D7 bit. The allocation of this bit is set to be the same as the allocation bit of the medal bet signal and the medal payout signal of the output port 4 (FIG. 20). The medal bet signal is turned on when the medal bet signal is output to the outside. Similarly, the medal payout signal is turned on when the medal payout signal is output (transmitted) to the outside.
In the present embodiment, the medal bet signal transmits the bet medal number data (how many bets are bet and the game is started) to the outside, and does not include the stored number data.

The external signal output flag (_FL_INF_OUT) of the address "F095 (H)" is an area for storing the external signal output flag, and when the external signals 1 to 3 are output, the corresponding bits are "1". Data. These external signals 1 to 3 are the same as the external signals 1 to 3 of the output port 4 (FIG. 20), and the bit allocation of these external signals 1 to 3 is assigned to the external signals 1 to 3 of the output port 4. It is set to match the bit allocation.

FIG. 31 shows a storage area for storing the timer value in the storage area of the RWM 53 of the present embodiment.
The timer value storage area of the present embodiment has a 1-byte timer storage area and a 2-byte timer storage area. The addresses of all 1-byte timer storage areas are arranged so as to be contiguous. Similarly, the addresses of all 2-byte timer storage areas are arranged contiguously. Further, the 2-byte timer storage area has a 1-byte storage area for storing the upper digit and a 1-byte storage area for storing the lower digit, and the addresses of these two 1-byte storage areas are consecutive. There is.

From the above, the 2-byte timer storage area is not arranged between the two 1-byte timer storage areas. Similarly, the 1-byte timer storage area is not arranged between the two 2-byte timer storage areas.
As for the address of the 2-byte timer storage area in the present embodiment, the smaller address value indicates the lower digit address, and the address obtained by adding "1" to the lower digit address value indicates the upper digit address. For example, in FIG. 31, in the 2-byte timer of the medal payout device control time, the address “F028 (H)” is the lower digit storage area, and the address “F029 (H)” is the upper digit storage area.

As shown in FIG. 31, the addresses of the storage areas for storing the timer values are arranged consecutively (in a serial number) from "F021 (H)" to "F02D (H)". Further, in the first embodiment, the start address "F021 (H)" is used as the reference address. The meaning of the "reference address" will be described later.

In the first embodiment of FIG. 31, the reference address starts from the 1-byte timer storage area, 7 1-byte timer storage areas are continuously arranged, and then 3 2-byte timer storage areas are continuously arranged. Have been placed.
Further, all timer values shown in FIG. 31 are subtracted (updated) at the time of timer measurement of interrupt processing described later. That is, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt.
Here, in FIG. 54, which will be described later, even when interrupt processing is executed, when a power failure is detected in step S603, the timer measurement in step S605 does not proceed, so that the timer value is always set during interrupt processing. It is not always subtracted (updated) by "1". Therefore, in the present specification, each timer value shown in FIG. 31 is described as "subtracting", but in reality, it means "subtracting", and in any case, it is always "subtracted". It does not mean that.
As described above, by continuously arranging the storage areas for storing the timer values, it is possible to sequentially update all the timer values by a simple method in the timer measurement (FIG. 55) described later.

Further, in the instruction of the MPU (1 chip microprocessor) of the present embodiment, even if it is a 2-byte timer, the subtraction process can be performed with one instruction. The subtraction process of the 2-byte timer is programmed as follows.
"0100 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "00FF (H)"
"0001 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "0000 (H)"
"0000 (H)"->"1"subtraction->"0000(H)"
Similarly, the 1-byte timer is also used.
"10 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "0F (H)"
"01 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "00 (H)"
"00 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "00 (H)"
Will be.

In other words, when a carry occurs (in the case of 1 byte) due to the subtraction process, it becomes "0000 (H)" (in the case of 2 bytes) or "00 (H)" (in the case of 1 byte).
Here, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the address to be subtracted is "0000 (H)" or "00 (H)", and it is "0000 (H)" or "00 (H)". In some cases, it is conceivable to use a program that prevents the subtraction process from being executed. In this case, it is necessary to determine whether or not the value is "0000 (H)" or "00 (H)" and whether or not to execute the subtraction process according to the determination result. ..
On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, when a carry occurs (or is), if it is set to "0000 (H)" or "00 (H)", the value before the calculation is "0000 (H)". Alternatively, the timer value can be updated by the same subtraction process regardless of whether or not it is "00 (H)", so that the program capacity can be simplified.

In FIG. 31, the external signal output time (_TM1_OUT_CNT) of the address “F021 (H)” is a timer value storage area for measuring the output time of the medal bet signal and the medal payout signal. In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the timer value has reached "0", the timer value "46 (D)" ("2E (H)" in hexadecimal number) is set again (step S742 in FIG. 58). , Executes a count that subtracts "1" for each interrupt.

In the present embodiment, the initial value of the external signal output time is set to "46 (D)", and the medal bet signal and the medal payout signal are set to double the actual number of bets and the number of payouts.
However, not limited to this, when the initial value of the external signal output time is set to "92 (D)", which is twice "46 (D)", and this timer value is "92 to 47 (D)", The on signal may be output, and the off signal may be output when the timer value is "46 to 1 (D)".
In this case, in FIG. 27, the number of times the medal bet signal is output at the address “F070 (H)” and the number of times the medal payout signal is output at the address “F071 (H)” need to be doubled. Instead, the number of bets and the number of payouts themselves may be stored, respectively. Therefore, in this case, "0 to 3 (D)" is stored in the medal bet signal output count of the address "F070 (H)", and the medal payout signal output count of the address "F071 (H)" is set. , "0 to 10 (D)" are stored.

For example, in a situation where "3" is stored in the number of times the medal bet signal is output at the address "F070 (H)", when the timer value is "92 to 47 (D)", an on signal is output and the timer value is set. When it is "46 to 1 (D)", it is controlled to output an off signal. Then, when the timer value becomes "0", the process of subtracting "1" from the number of times the medal bet signal is output (in this example, the process of updating from "3 (D)" to "2 (D)") The process of resetting the timer value "92 (D)" is executed.
By repeating such processing until the number of times the medal bet signal is output becomes "0", when "3 (D)" is stored in the number of times the medal bet signal is output at the address "F070 (H)", the medal The process of outputting the on signal as the bet signal and the process of outputting the off signal are executed three times. Further, in a situation where "0" is stored in the number of times the medal bet signal is output at the address "F070 (H)", the timer value is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt (timer value is "92 to"). Although the process of circulating "0 (D)") is performed, the off signal is controlled to be output regardless of the timer value.
Although the above description has been given by taking the medal bet signal as an example, the on-signal output and the off-signal output of the medal payout signal are processed in the same manner (the data of the address "F071 (H)" and the address "F021 (" It can be controlled (based on the timer value of "H)".

The reel stop reception waiting time (_TM1_STOP) at the address "F022 (H)" is a timer value storage area for measuring the waiting time from the operation of the stop switch 42 to the operation of the next stop switch 42. .. When the first or second stop switch 42 is operated, the timer value "7 (D)" ("7 (H)" in hexadecimal) is set (step S326 in FIG. 51), and "1" is set for each interrupt. Executes the count to be subtracted.

The payout sensor check time (_TM1_PAY) of the address "F023 (H)" is an area for storing a timer value for monitoring payout detection after the drive of the hopper motor 36 is stopped and a timer value for detecting medal clogging. is there. In the present embodiment, in the one medal payout (M_1MEDAL_PAY) described later, a timer value "46 (D)" (hexadecimal "2E (H)") is set as a detection time when a predetermined timing is reached. , Executes a count that subtracts "1" for each interrupt.
Specifically, first, when the signal of the payout sensor 1 is detected, the timer value "46 (D)" is set as the payout sensor 1 detection time (step S259 in FIG. 46), and the timer value is "0". Even when the signal of the payout sensor 1 is on, it is determined that the medal is jammed.

Secondly, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the timer value "46 (D)" is set as the payout sensor 1 detection time (step S261 in FIG. 46), and the timer value becomes "0". If the signal of the payout sensor 1 does not turn on even at that time, it is determined that the medal empty error (hopper empty).
Thirdly, when the payout sensor 1 signal is turned on and then the payout sensor 1 and 2 signals are turned on, the timer value "46 (D)" is set as the payout sensor 2 detection time (FIG. Step S268 of 46). Then, if the signal of the payout sensor 2 does not turn off even when the timer value becomes "0", it is determined that the medal is jammed.

The condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) of the address "F024 (H)" is an area for storing a timer value for measuring the output time of the condition device signal (winning and replay condition device information, and accessory condition device information). is there. In the present embodiment, "25 (D)"("19(H)" in hexadecimal number) is set after the minimum game time has elapsed (step S316 in FIG. 50), and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. To.
In the present embodiment, about 53.64 ms is counted by 24 interrupts, and this 53.64 ms is the output time of the condition device signal. Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, after the timer value "25 (D)" is set after the minimum game time has elapsed, the timer value is set to "24 (D)" (hexa-dichlorophenoic number "24 (D)" in the first interrupt processing. It will be updated to 18 (H) "). Then, while the timer value is "24 (D) to 13 (D)" (hexadecimal, "18 (H) to D (H)"), the accessory condition device information is output and the timer value is set. While it is "12 (D) to 1 (D)" (hexadecimal, "C (H) to 1 (H)"), the winning and replay condition device information is output. Further, while the timer value is "0", the value of "0" is output as the condition device information.

The external signal 4 output time (_TM1_POWER_ON) when the power is turned off and restored at the address "F025 (H)" is a timer value storage area that counts the time when the external signal 4 (D1 bit of the output port 4) is output when the power is turned off and restored. is there. In the present embodiment, when a recovery from a power failure is detected, "136 (D)" ("88 (H)" in hexadecimal) is set as the initial value of this value (step S39 in FIG. 33), and one interrupt is performed. Subtract by "1" for each. Then, it is determined that the external signal 4 is output until this value becomes "0".

The blocker-off monitoring time (_TM1_BLOFF_CHK) of the address "F026 (H)" is set when the passage sensor 43a rises (step S702 in FIG. 56), and stores the standby timer value when the blocker 45 is turned from on to off. Area to do. When the rising data of the passage sensor 43a is detected, "144 (D)" ("90 (H)" in hexadecimal) is set as an initial value, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. Then, the blocker 45 is not turned from on to off until this value becomes "0". In this way, the fact that the blocker 45 is not turned from on to off for a certain period of time after the passage sensor 43a detects the medal prevents the medal from being pinched between the medal selector and the blocker 45 (and thus, a medal retention error, etc.). To prevent).

The blocker-on monitoring time (_TM1_BLON_CHK) of the address "F027 (H)" is set when the passage sensor 43a rises (step S703 in FIG. 56), and stores the standby timer value when the blocker 45 is turned from off to on. Area to do. When the rising data of the passage sensor 43a is detected, "45 (D)" ("2D (H)" in hexadecimal) is set as an initial value, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. Then, the blocker 45 is not turned on from off until this value becomes "0". In this way, the reason why the blocker 45 is not turned on from off for a certain period of time after the passage sensor 43a detects the medal is to prevent the medal from being pinched between the medal selector and the blocker 45 as described above. is there.

Further, the difference between the waiting time when the blocker 45 is turned from on to off (“145” interrupt) and the waiting time when the blocker 45 is turned from off to on (“46” interrupt) is that the blocker 45 is turned on. This is because the time required to turn off is longer than the time required to turn the blocker 45 from off to on.
Although not shown in this embodiment, the blocker 45 is turned from off to on by attracting it with the magnetic force of a magnet. On the other hand, when the blocker 45 is turned from on to off, it depends on the action of releasing the blocker 45 by a spring. In this way, it is based on the difference between the time from off to on and the time from on to off due to the difference in the power used.

The medal payout device control time (_TM2_HE_CHK) of the addresses "F028 (H)" and "F029 (H)" is an area for storing a timer value for measuring the control time of the medal payout device, that is, the hopper motor 36. An initial value is set to count the number of interrupts "2686" when the hopper motor 36 is started to be driven (step S255 in FIG. 46). Then, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt.
Here, as the initial value of the timer value, "2686 (D)"("0A7E(H)" in hexadecimal number) is set, or "FF (H)" is set to "0A7E (H)". Set the added "0B7D (H)". Depending on which value is set, the method of determining whether or not the number of interrupts "2686" is counted differs. This point will be described later.
Then, when the initial value "0A7E (H)" is set and the timer value is "0", it is determined that the medal payout device control time has elapsed.
On the other hand, when the initial value "0B7D (H)" is set and the timer value is "00FF (H)" or less, it is determined that the medal payout device control time has elapsed.

The game standby display start time (_TM2_BACK_OFF) of the addresses "F02A (H)" and "F02B (H)" is an area for storing a timer value for measuring the waiting time until the game standby display is performed. At the game start set (MS_GAME_SET), an initial value is set in order to count the number of interrupts "26846" (step S81 in FIG. 35). The game standby display start time of the present embodiment is set to "about 60 seconds" (26846 × 2.235 ms ≈ 60 seconds).
Here, as the initial value of the timer value, "26846 (D)"("68DE(H)" in hexadecimal number) is set, or "FF (H)" is set to "68DE (H)" in the same manner as above. ) ”Is added to“ 69DD (H) ”. Then, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt.
Then, when the initial value "68DE (H)") is set, when the timer value is "0", it is determined that the game standby display start time has elapsed.
On the other hand, when the initial value "69DD (H)" is set and the timer value is "00FF (H)" or less, it is determined that the game standby display start time has elapsed.

The minimum game time (_TM2_GAME) of the addresses "F02C (H)" and "F02D (H)" is a timer that monitors one minimum game time, and is the number of interrupts when it is determined that the minimum game time has passed. An initial value is set in order to count "1836" (step S312 in FIG. 50). The minimum game time of this embodiment is set to "about 4.1 seconds" (2.235 ms × 1836 ≈ 4100 ms).
Here, as the initial value of the timer value, "1836 (D)"("072C(H)" in hexadecimal number) is set, or "FF (H)" is added to "072C (H)". Set the "082B (H)". Then, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt.
Then, when the initial value "072C (H)") is set, when the timer value is "0", it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed.
On the other hand, when the initial value "082B (H)" is set and the timer value is "00FF (H)" or less, it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed.

The timer shown in FIG. 31 is a count value stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53, and the game can proceed even after the predetermined value is set. In this respect, it differs from the 2-byte time waiting process (FIG. 39) described later. In the 2-byte wait process, the interrupt wait process (FIG. 40) is executed, and during that time, the progress of the game is in the wait (wait process) state.

Subsequently, the information processing by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55) will be described based on the flowchart.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a process (M_PRG_START) when starting a program by the main control board 50.
In FIG. 39, when the program is started in step S11, the main control board 50 initializes the registers in the next step S12. Specific processing includes, for example, a process of storing the upper address of the RWM53 (F0 (H) in the present embodiment) in the Q register. By this processing, for example, when the address of RWM53 is specified, only the lower address (for example, "21 (H)" when the address "F021 (H)" is specified) is specified, so that the Q register is specified. By combining with the data (F0 (H)), it becomes possible to specify the address "F021 (H)" of the RWM53, which leads to a reduction in the program capacity.

Next, the process proceeds to step S13, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power cutoff processed flag is a normal value. In the present embodiment, when the power is turned off (step S619 in FIG. 54), the power off processed flag is stored in a predetermined address (not shown) of the RWM 53. This power-off processing flag is a flag for determining whether or not the previous power-off was normally performed when the power was turned on. Then, in step S13, when it is determined that the power off processing flag is a normal value (“01 (H)” in this embodiment), the process proceeds to step S14, which is not a normal value (in this embodiment, ““ 01 (H) ”). When it is determined (other than 01 (H)), the process proceeds to step S16 without calculating the checksum data in steps S14 and S15.

In step S14, the checksum of the RWM 53 is calculated. Specifically, the checksum calculation (addition of the data value of the target address) in the same range as the checksum of the RWM53 executed at the time of power off processing (for example, the work area used in the program, the unused area, and the stack area) To execute.
In the present embodiment, the checksum data of the RWM 53 is set so that the checksum of a predetermined range of the RWM 53 is performed and the data becomes "0" by the checksum.

In step S15, it is determined whether or not the range of RWM53 for calculating the checksum is completed. Specifically, the next address is specified from the address of the RWM53 for which the checksum is calculated at the present time, and it is determined whether or not the next address is the address for which the checksum is calculated. When it is determined that the checksum calculation has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S14. On the other hand, when it is determined that the range of RWM53 for calculating the checksum is completed, the process proceeds to step S16.
In the subsequent processing as well, when the data stored in the plurality of ranges (addresses) of the RWM53 is initialized, the same processing is executed in the range of the designated RWM53 in the present embodiment.

In step S16, the main control board 50 stores the power supply cutoff / recovery data in a predetermined register (for example, the B register). Here, when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value and the checksum data of the RWM 53 is a normal value, the normal value is stored as the power-off recovery data. On the other hand, when the power off processing flag is an abnormal value (when "No" in step S13), and / or the checksum data of RWM53 is an abnormal value (check of the entire range calculated in step S14). When it is determined that the sum data value is not "0"), an abnormal value is stored as power-off / recovery data.

In the next step S17, the level data of the input port 1 (FIG. 18) is stored in a predetermined register (for example, the A register). Next, the process proceeds to step S18, and it is determined whether or not the designated switch is on based on the level data of the input port 1. Here, the "designated switch" is, in the present embodiment, two of the input port 1, the signal of the door switch 15 (D1) and the signal of the setting key switch 12 (D3).

Then, only when the signal of the door switch 15 is on (the front cover (housing) is opened) and the signal of the setting key switch 12 is on (when the setting key is inserted). Allow setting changes. When all two designated switches are on, it is possible to shift to the setting change process in step S22, but when at least one designated switch is not turned on, it is not permitted to shift to the setting change process in step S22. ..
That is, when the signal of the door switch 15 is off (when the front cover is closed), the signal of the setting key switch 12 cannot be turned on, and there is a high possibility of fraud, so the setting is changed. Do not allow migration to processing.

Therefore, when it is determined in step S18 that all the designated switches are on, the process proceeds to step S19, and when it is determined that the switches are not on, the process proceeds to step S21.
In step S19, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power supply cutoff / recovery data is an abnormal value. This power supply cutoff / recovery data is the data stored in the register in step S16.

Then, when it is determined that the power-off / recovery data is an abnormal value, the process proceeds to the setting change process in step S22 while maintaining the fact that the power-off / recovery data is an abnormal value (data stored in step S16), and the abnormal value is obtained. If it is determined that this is not the case, the process proceeds to step S20. In step S20, it is determined whether or not the setting change impossible flag is on. Here, the setting non-changeable flag is the D6 bit value of the above-mentioned medal management flag (FIG. 25), and in FIG. 34, from the combination lottery process (step S60) to the game end check process (step S69). It is a flag that is disabled. Then, when the setting change impossibility flag is on, the process proceeds to step S21, and when it is not on, the setting change process in step S22 is performed while maintaining the fact that the power off / returning data is a normal value (data stored in step S16). move on. In this way, the present embodiment has a setting change process when the power supply cutoff / recovery data is an abnormal value and a setting change process when the power supply cutoff / recovery data is a normal value.
In the present embodiment, the setting change impossible flag is provided, but if the setting can be changed at all times, the setting change impossible flag may not be provided. In that case, the processing corresponding to steps S19 and S20 becomes unnecessary, and the process proceeds to the setting change processing in step S22 regardless of whether or not the power off / returning is abnormal.

In step S21, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power supply cutoff / recovery data is a normal value. This process is the same as step S19, and refers to the data stored in the register in step S16. Then, when it is determined that the power supply cutoff / recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S23 to perform the power supply recovery process (FIG. 33). On the other hand, when it is determined that the power supply cutoff / recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S24 to perform recovery impossible error processing. The error when it is determined in step S21 that the power off / returning data is not a normal value is referred to as an "E1" error in the present embodiment, and the fact that it is "E1" is displayed on the digits 3 and 4 (acquired number display LED78). To do. The unrecoverable error is an error that cannot be cleared unless the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed. Specifically, it can be canceled by clearing a predetermined range of RWM53 (in this embodiment, F000 (H) to F1FF (H)) by clearing RWM in the setting change process.

As described above, in the program start process, when the setting can be changed, the process proceeds to the setting change process in both the case where the power off / returning data is a normal value and the case where the setting is an abnormal value.
Further, when the designated switch is not turned on (“No” in step S18) or the setting cannot be changed and the power off / returning data is an abnormal value (“No” in step S21), an unrecoverable error process is performed. When the power supply cutoff / recovery data is a normal value (“Yes” in step S21), the process proceeds to the power supply recovery process (FIG. 33).

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) in step S23 in FIG. 32.
First, in step S31, the stack pointer is returned. Here, the stack pointer is an area (stack) of RWM53 that stores data at the time of power failure (for example, register value, program address of instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing, etc.) when power failure occurs. It is referred to as an area, and in the present embodiment, it refers to one of the registers indicating which area (address) of F1E0 (H) to F1FF (H)) has been stored (also referred to as SP register). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the predetermined address of the RWM 53 in the power off processing of step S619, and the value stored in the address is stored in the stack pointer in step S31.
In the next step S32, the set value stored in the RWM 53 is read, and it is determined whether or not the range of the set value is within the normal range (whether it is “1” to “6”). When it is determined that the set value is in the normal range, the process proceeds to step S33, and when it is determined that the set value is not in the normal range, the process proceeds to step S42, and the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error processing. The error in this case is referred to as an "E6" error in the present embodiment, and the fact that it is "E6" is displayed on the digits 3 and 4 (acquired number display LED78).

Proceeding to step S33, the initialization range of the unused area of the RWM 53 is set in the register. Then, in the next step S34, the initialization of the RWM53 in the range set in the step S33 is executed. Here, it is conceivable that the value is stored in the RWM 53 due to noise or the like even in the unused area. If a value is stored in the unused area, it may lead to fraudulent activity, so the unused area should be initialized when the power is turned on (usually once a day). There is.
In the next step S35, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 53 has been completed, and if it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S36. In step S36, the data of input ports 0 to 2 (FIGS. 21 to 23) is set, and in the next step S37, input ports 0 to 2 are read. This process is a process for updating each data (level data, rising data, falling data) of the input port before the power is turned off to the latest data.

Next, the process proceeds to step S38, and the specific information data at the time of turning on the power is set. This process is a process of setting the D6 bit (transmission bit at the time of power failure recovery) of the specific information flag (FIG. 24) to “1”. In the next step S39, the external signal 4 output time is set when the power is turned off and restored. In this process, “136 (D)” is set as the output time of the external signal 4 when the power is turned off and restored at the address “F025 (H)” in FIG. As a result, this value is subtracted for each interrupt.
In the next step S40, an interrupt is activated. This process is, for example, a process of setting the timer interrupt cycle, and the timer interrupt process (FIG. 54) is executed after the process.
Next, the process proceeds to step S41, and the power off processing flag is cleared, that is, set to "0". Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed. After the processing according to this flowchart is completed, the process returns to the step immediately before the power is turned off during the main processing of FIG. 34.

In the power recovery process, the interrupt process is activated (step S40) after the input ports 0 to 2 are read (step S37). The reason is as follows.
As will be described later, it is configured so that the setting value can be confirmed by inserting the setting key during the game standby. Here, when the falling signal of the setting key switch 12 becomes "1", it is determined that the confirmation of the set value is completed.
However, for example, it is assumed that the power is cut off during the setting confirmation, and the setting key switch 12 is turned off (the setting key is pulled out) and the power is turned on during the power off.

In this case, the fall signal of the setting key switch 12 becomes "1" based on the fact that the setting key switch 12 is turned off by the interrupt processing after the power is turned off and on, so that the fall of the setting key switch is detected. To.
As a result, the state at the time of power off and recovery and the state before the power off are different. Specifically, the fall signal of the setting key switch 12 is "0" in the state before the power is turned off, whereas the fall signal of the setting key switch 12 is "1" when the power is turned off and restored.
Therefore, in order to avoid such a different state before and after the power is turned off, when the power is turned off and restored, the values of RWM53 of the input ports 0 to 2 are updated to the latest state, so that the input ports 0 to 2 After executing the read process, the interrupt process is started.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the main process (M_MAIN) process in the present embodiment. Then, during this main process, interrupt processing (FIG. 54), which will be described later, is performed every 2.235 ms.
Further, FIGS. 35 to 53 are processes showing subroutines during the main process.

In FIG. 34, in step S51, the stack pointer is set. Specifically, it is a process of setting "F200 (H)" as an initial value as a stack pointer. For example, when "F200 (H)" is specified as the stack pointer, the address where information such as registers is stored in the stack area is the stack area (F1E0 (H) to F1FF (H)). It becomes "F1FF (H)".
In the next step S52, the game start set process (MS_GAME_SET) is performed. Proceeding to step S52, the process proceeds to the process of FIG. 35, which will be described later.

In the next step S53, the bet medal is read. This process is a process of reading how many medals are bet at the present time (different from reading the number of stored medals).
In the next step S54, the presence or absence of a bet medal is determined based on the number of bets read in step S53.

If it is determined in step S54 that there is a bet medal, the process proceeds to step S56, and if it is determined that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S55 to wait for medal insertion (MS_STANDBY_DSP; FIG. 42), and then proceed to step S56. The medal insertion waiting process is a process of detecting a setting key switch signal and determining whether or not the game standby display start time has elapsed.

In step S56, the medal management process (MS_MEDAL_CHK; FIG. 43) is performed. This process is a process of determining whether or not a medal has been inserted, whether or not the settlement switch 46 has been operated, and the like.
In the next step S57, the soft random number is updated. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding "1" at a time) a processing random number for processing (calculation processing) into a random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used in the winning combination lottery means 61. The soft random number is a 16-bit random number having a range of 0 to 65535 (D). As an update method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (count value (variable) incremented at the time of interrupt) to the value before update may be executed.

In the next step S58, the main control board 50 performs a start switch check process (M_START_CHK; FIG. 48). This process is a process of determining whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. In the start switch check in step S58, if it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S59, and if it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S53.
In step S59, the start switch acceptance process (MS_START_CTL; FIG. 49) is performed. This process sets various flags, sets the number of times the medal bet signal is output, and the like.

Next, the process proceeds to step S60, and the main control board 50 (combination lottery means 61) draws a combination (condition device). Here, the lottery of the winning combination is executed at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. That is, the random number value at the time of the winning combination lottery is acquired by accepting the start switch in step S59. Then, in step S60, a process of determining whether or not the acquired random number value is a random number value corresponding to any of the conditional devices is performed using the lottery table. The winning condition device number is stored in the winning and replay condition device number of FIG. 28 described above and the accessory condition device number.

In the next step S61, the main control board 50 (push order instruction number selection means 63) executes the push order instruction number setting process. In this process, in the game (instruction function operating game) in which the push order instruction information is displayed according to the winning condition device, the push order instruction number is selected and stored in the push order instruction number of RWM53 in FIG. 28. I do. By this process, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Next, the process proceeds to step S62, and the main control board 50 (effect group number selection means 64) executes the effect group number setting process. This process is for selecting an effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device, storing the selected number in the effect group number of RWM53 in FIG. 28, and transmitting the effect group number to the sub-control board 80. It is a process to store the effect group number in the control command buffer.

In the next step S63, the reel rotation start preparation process (M_REEL_READY; FIG. 50) is executed. This process executes a process of determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed, a process of saving the condition device information corresponding to the winning condition device number, and the like.
Next, the process proceeds to step S64, and the reel control means 65 starts the rotation of the reel 31. In the next step S65, the main control board 50 performs stop control (M_REEL_STOP; FIG. 51) of the reel 31. This process is a process of stopping and controlling the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected.

If it is determined in step S65 that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S66.
In step S66, first, the display determination of the symbol is performed. Here, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the effective line. Then, the symbol combination flag is updated in FIG. 26 according to the combination of the stopped symbols. For example, when it is determined that the symbol combination of the replay has stopped at the effective line, the D0 bit of the symbol combination flag is set to "1".

Further, in step S66, secondly, in FIG. 27, the value of the medal payout number data is updated. For example, when one medal combination wins and the medal payout number data up to that point is "0", it is updated from "0" to "1". Further, in FIG. 27, the value of the medal payout number data buffer is also updated in the same manner.
Next, the process proceeds to step S67, and it is determined whether or not a symbol display error has occurred. When it is determined that a symbol display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S72, and when it is determined that no display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S68.

Here, since the reel 31 is stopped based on the stop position determination table, normally, the reel 31 does not stop at a position other than the position defined in the stop position determination table. However, as a result of the symbol display determination, when a symbol (kicking symbol) that should not be originally displayed is displayed on the effective line, it is determined to be abnormal, and when the process proceeds to step S72, it cannot be restored. Perform error handling. This symbol combination abnormality error is referred to as an "E5" error, "E5" is displayed on the digits 3 and 4 (acquired number display LED78), and the main process is stopped.

In the next step S68, the payout means 67 executes a medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY; FIG. 52) corresponding to the winning combination. This process includes an actual medal payout process, a process of setting the number of payout signal outputs, and the like. In the next step S69, the main control board 50 executes the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK; FIG. 53). This process is a process of clearing various flags and the like.
In the next step S70, an output request at the end of the game is set. This process is a process of storing information to be transmitted as a control command in the D register and the E register in order to transmit the fact that one game is completed to the sub control board 80. Specifically, it is a process of storing "3F (H)" in the D register and "FF (H)" in the E register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S71, and the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET; FIG. 36). This process is a process of storing control command data to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in a control command buffer (not shown) provided in the RWM 53.
Then, when the process of step S71 is completed, the process returns to step S50 again.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the game start set (MS_GAME_SET) in step S52 of FIG. 34.
First, in step S81, the game standby display start time is set. This process is a process of setting "26846 (D)" or "27101 (D)" to the game standby display start time of the address "F02A (H)" in FIG. If the game standby display start time is set here, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt process from this point.

When the game standby display start time becomes “0”, the acquired number data (address “F06E (H)” in FIG. 27) is cleared in step S162 while waiting for the medal insertion in FIG. 42. As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. For example, even if the number of medals paid out to the game last time is "9" and the player pays by operating the checkout switch 46 and finishes the game, "00" is displayed after about 1 minute. Will be done. This has the effect that the vacant table can be reduced because the clerk in the hall or another player can recognize it as a vacant table.

The acquired number display LED 78 after the game standby display start time has elapsed is not limited to the display of "00", but may be "* 0" or "**". Here, "*" indicates that the light is off.
When displaying "* 0", the LED display request flag (described later) of the digit 3 may be set to "0" when the game standby display start time is "0". As a result, even when the interrupt processing is when the digit 3 is lit, the segments A to G of the digit 3 are controlled so as not to be lit.
Similarly, when displaying "**", the LED display request flag of the digits 3 and 4 may be set to "0" when the game standby display start time is "0". As a result, even when the interrupt processing is when the digit 3 or the digit 4 is lit, the segments A to G of the digit 3 or the digit 4 are controlled so as not to be lit.

Next, the process proceeds to step S82, and the push order instruction number initialization process is executed. This process is a process of clearing the push order instruction number stored in the address “F085 (H)” in FIG. 28.
In the next step S83, the data of the symbol combination display flag is acquired. This process is a process of storing the data of the symbol combination on the effective line after the reel 31 is stopped in the previous game, that is, the symbol combination display flag (“F015 (H)” in FIG. 26) in the A register.
In the next step S84, it is determined whether or not the 1BB operation symbol is displayed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit stored in the A register value is "1", if it is "1", it is determined as "Yes", and if it is "0", it is determined as "No". ". When it is determined that the 1BB operation symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S85, and when it is determined that the 1BB operation symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S86.

In step S85, the number of sheets that can be acquired when 1BB is operated (during 1BB game) is saved. In this process, a predetermined value, for example, a value of "150" (FIG. 10) in the case of 1BBA is stored (stored) in an area (not shown) for storing the number of sheets that can be acquired during a 1BB game provided in the RWM53. It is a process. Then, the process proceeds to step S86.

In the next step S86, the operating state flag is generated. In this step S86, the following processes (1) to (5) are executed.
(1) The address of the operating state flag is stored in the HL register. As shown in FIG. 26, since the address of the operating state flag is "F014 (H)", the H register value = "F0 (H)" and the L register value = "14 (H)".
(2) Next, the A register value and the information stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (in other words, the address specified by the HL register value; the same applies hereinafter) are OR-operated, and the operation result is A. Store in the register. Here, the data of the symbol combination display flag is stored in the A register in step S83, and the information stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is the information of the operating state flag.

Specifically, for example, it is as follows.
Example 1)
When a combination of 1BB symbols is displayed,
A register value: 00001000 (B)
Information stored in the address indicated by the HL register value: 00000000 (B)
A register value after OR operation: 00001000 (B)
Will be.
Example 2)
When the combination of 1BB symbols is already displayed and 1BB and RB are in operation,
A register value: 00000000 (B)
Information stored in the address indicated by the HL register value: 00011000 (B)
A register value after OR operation: 00011000 (B)
Will be.

Example 3)
When the combination of 1BB symbols is already displayed and 1BB is operating but RB is not operating,
A register value: 00000000 (B)
Information stored in the address indicated by the HL register value: 00001000 (B) A register value after OR operation: 00001000 (B)
Will be.

(3) The A register value is stored in the C register.
For example, taking the above Examples 1) to 3) as an example, it is as follows.
Example 1) and Example 3)
A register value: 00001000 (B)
C register value: 00001000 (B)
Example 2)
A register value: 00011000 (B)
C register value: 00011000 (B)

(4) The information stored in the A register and the information in which the bit corresponding to 1BB is set to "1" are ANDed, and the calculation result is stored in the A register.
For example, taking the above Examples 1) to 3) as an example, it is as follows.
Example 1) and Example 3)
A register value: 00001000 (B)
Information in which the bit corresponding to 1BB is set to "1": 00001000 (B)
A register value after AND operation: 00001000 (B)
Example 2)
A register value: 00011000 (B)
Information in which the bit corresponding to 1BB is set to "1": 00001000 (B)
A register value after AND operation: 00001000 (B)

(5) The operation of rotating the A register value to the left is performed, and the operation result is stored in the A register.
For example, taking the above Examples 1) to 3) as an example, it is as follows.
A register value (before calculation): 00001000 (B)
A register value (after calculation): 00010000 (B)

In the next step S87, the operating state flag is updated. This process is a process of ORing the A register value and the C register value and storing the operation result in the A register.
For example, taking the above Examples 1) to 3) as an example, it is as follows.
Example 1)
A register value: 00010000 (B)
C register value: 00001000 (B)
A register value (after OR calculation): 00011000 (B)
Example 2)
A register value: 00010000 (B)
C register value: 00011000 (B)
A register value (after OR calculation): 00011000 (B)
Example 3)
A register value: 00010000 (B)
C register value: 00001000 (B)
A register value (after OR calculation): 00011000 (B)

Further, in the next step S88, the operating state flag is saved (stored). This process is a process of storing the value stored in the A register at the address of the RWM 53 indicated by the HL register value (that is, the operating state flag). As a result, the information on the operating state flag up to that point is replaced with the information on the operating state flag updated in step S87. For example, as in Example 1), when a combination of 1BB symbols is displayed (at the time of winning 1BB), the D3 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operating state flag changes from "0" to "1".
Further, as in Example 2), when 1BB and RB are in operation, the state is maintained (the D3 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operating state flag and the D4 bit corresponding to RB are “1”).

Furthermore, as in Example 3), when 1BB is operating but RB is not operating, the D4 bit corresponding to the RB of the operating state flag changes from “0” to “1”. In the present embodiment, in the 1BB game, the RB operation flag is turned off (“0”) at the end of the two games (or when winning twice), but when the end condition of the 1BB game is not satisfied (operating state). (When the D3 bit corresponding to 1BB of the flag is "1") is set to "1" in this step S88.

In the next step S89, it is determined whether or not the RB operation has started. This process is a process of performing an XOR operation on the information stored in the A register and the information stored in the C register, storing the operation result in the A register, and determining whether or not the zero flag is "1". ..
Taking Examples 1) to 3) above as an example, it is as follows.
Example 1) and Example 3)
A register value: 00011000 (B)
C register value: 00001000 (B)
A register value (after XOR operation): 00010000 (B) (zero flag ≠ 1)
Example 2)
A register value: 00011000 (B)
C register value: 00011000 (B)
A register value (after XOR operation): 00000000 (B) (zero flag = 1)

Then, when the zero flag = "1", it is determined as "No" and the process proceeds to step S91, and when the zero flag ≠ "1", it is determined as "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S90. As described above, in step S89,
a) At the start of the 1BB game b) After the RB operation is completed, if the end condition of the 1BB game is not satisfied, it is judged as "Yes".
In the next step S90, the number of games played and the number of winnings when the RB is activated are saved. This process saves (stores) "2" in the storage area (not shown) of the game count counter during RB operation provided in the RWM53, and also stores (stores) the winning count counter during RB operation (not shown). ) Is a process of saving (memorizing) "2". Then, the process proceeds to step S91.

Both the game count counter when the RB is activated and the winning counter when the RB is activated are set to "2" as initial values, and each time the number of games or the number of winnings increases by "1", "1" is set. It is a counter that is decremented one by one. However, not limited to this, the initial values of these counter values are set to "0", and each time the number of games or winnings increases by "1", they are incremented by "1", and these counter values become "2". You may decide whether or not you have reached.

In step S91, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols of the replay is displayed (whether the replay has won a prize) based on the data of the symbol combination display flag acquired in step S83. When it is determined that the combination of the symbols of the replay is displayed, the process proceeds to step S92, and when it is determined that the combination of the symbols of the replay is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S94.

In step S92, the main control board 50 reads the bet medal. This process is a process of reading the number of medals bet in the previous game (address “F06B (H)” in FIG. 27). Next, the process proceeds to step S93, and the automatic bet number data is set. This process is a process of updating the automatic bet number data of the address “F06A (H)” in FIG. 27 (for example, storing “3 (D)” in a normal game).

Next, the process proceeds to step S94, and the output request of the operating state is set. In the next step S95, the control command set 1 is executed. Specifically, a control command for transmitting information indicating that the replay has been activated or that 1BB or the like has been activated to the sub-control board 80 is stored in the control command buffer. Although not shown, the control command is stored in the control command buffer in order to transmit information about the set value of the game this time, information about RT of the game this time, and the like. Then, the process proceeds to step S96, and the process proceeds to the medal acceptance start process (MS_MEDAL_START; FIG. 38).

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the processing of the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET) in step S71 of FIG. 34, for example. Specifically, this process is a process executed when a control command for transmission is stored in the control command buffer in the main process. In other words, when the control command for transmission is stored in the control command buffer by interrupt processing, the control command set 1 is not executed, and the control command set 2 described later is directly executed.

First, in step S501, interrupt prohibition processing is executed. In the next step S502, the control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET; FIG. 37) is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S503, and the interrupt processing prohibited in step S501 is canceled (that is, interrupt is enabled). By the above processing, interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of the control command set 2.
Then, in the control command set 2, the control command is written as shown below, but the interrupt processing is prohibited as described above during the execution of the control command set 2. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a malfunction (such as writing to an address different from the normal write address) due to the interrupt processing being executed during the write processing of the control command.

Here, an interrupt flag is provided to store the prohibition / cancellation of the interrupt. The interrupt flag is turned on when the timing for executing the next interrupt processing (within 2.235 ms from the time when the interrupt processing is prohibited) arrives after the interrupt processing is prohibited in step S501. Then, when canceling the prohibited interrupt processing, the main CPU 55 then clears the interrupt flag.
When the timing to execute the interrupt processing comes, the main control board 50 determines on / off of the interrupt flag, and determines whether to prohibit / enable the interrupt processing.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET) in step S502 of FIG. 36. As described above, when one control command is stored in the control command buffer by interrupt processing, the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET) is not executed. Further, when the control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET) is executed, the information constituting one control command is stored in the D register and the E register.
First, in step S511, the address (not shown) of the control command buffer is set. This process is a process of storing the start address of the control command buffer in the HL register. Although not shown in FIGS. 21 to 31 described above, the RWM 53 is provided with a plurality of storage areas for storing control command buffers.
In the next step S512, the control command write pointer value is acquired. The control command write pointer is for specifying to which address of the RWM53 the control command data is written, and the write pointer at the present time is stored at a predetermined address (not shown) of the RWM53. The process of reading the write pointer is performed.
In the processing here, the control command write pointer value is stored in the A register value. For example, when the value stored in the control command write pointer value) is "1", the A register value = "1".

In the next step S513, the designated address is acquired. In this process, the address to be written (of RWM53) is obtained from the start address of the control command buffer and the data indicating the current position of the write pointer.
Next, the process proceeds to step S514 to acquire the data of the designated address. This process is a process of reading the data stored in the storage area of the RWM53 of the address obtained in step S513 of the preprocessing.

In the "control command <64?" In the next step S515, it is determined whether or not the value of the data at the specified address (A register value stored in step S514) is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined. , It is a process of determining "Yes".
Here, "No" is determined in step S515 when the A register value is not "0". When the A register value is not "0", it means that the data has already been written to the control command buffer at the address indicated by the control command write pointer value, and the data cannot be written to the address. In this way, when there is data at the designated address, the data writing process is not executed, so that overwriting when there is data at the designated address is prevented.
If "Yes" is determined in step S515, the process proceeds to step S516, and if "No" is determined, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In the next step S516, "store the control command in the RWM", the HL register value is subtracted by "1". Then, the E register value is stored in the address indicated by the HL register value, and the D register value is stored in the address indicated by the "HL + 1" register value.
As a result, the E register value and the D register value can be stored in the addresses (control command buffers) of the two consecutive RWM53s.

In the next step S517, the control command write pointer value is updated.
In this process, first, the control command write pointer value stored in the predetermined address (not shown) of the RWM 53 is stored in the HL register.
Next, "1" is added to the value stored in the HL register. Here, when the result of adding "1" exceeds "64 (D)", it is set to "0".
Then, the added value (value stored in the HL register) is stored in the control command write pointer value. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the start of medal acceptance (MS_MEDAL_START) in step S96 of FIG. 35.
First, in step S101, the data on the number of bet medals is cleared. That is, it is a process of clearing the number of bets in the previous game. Specifically, in FIG. 27, a process of setting the value of the medal bet number data of the address “F06B (H)” to “0” is performed.
Next, the process proceeds to step S102 to turn off the bet display LEDs (79a to 79c). Specifically, in FIG. 25, the process of setting the D0 to D2 bits of the bet number display LED signal data of the address “F012 (H)” to “0” is performed. The number of bets in the previous game may be displayed by the bet display LEDs (79a to 79c) without executing step S102. This makes it possible to check how many medals were bet and played in the previous game. Then, the display of the bet display LEDs (79a to 79c) may be updated only when the medal of the game is actually bet this time. In the next step S103, the medal management flag is initialized. Specifically, in FIG. 25, the process of setting the D0, D2 to D4, D6, and D7 bits of the medal management flag of the address “F011 (H)” to “0” is performed.

In the next step S104, the main control board 50 checks the operating state flag. Here, the operation state flag is checked in order to determine whether or not the replay is in operation in the next step S105. In the present embodiment, in step S104, the value of the D0 bit (replay) of the operating state flag (FIG. 26) is read.

Next, the process proceeds to step S105, and based on the reading in step S104, it is determined whether or not the replay is in operation, that is, whether or not the D0 bit is “1”. When it is determined that the D0 bit is “1”, that is, when the replay is in operation, the process proceeds to step S106, and when it is determined that the replay is not in operation, the process proceeds to step S118.
When it is determined that the replay is not in operation and the process proceeds to step S118, the process of turning on the blocker 45 (MS_BLOCKER_ON; FIG. 41) is executed, and the process according to this flowchart is completed. That is, when the replay is not activated, the medals are uniformly allowed to be taken care of.
Therefore, in the medal acceptance start processing of this flowchart, the processing after step S106 corresponds to the automatic betting processing at the time of replay operation.

In step S106, the waiting time at the time of replay operation is set. In the present embodiment, in order to set the wait time to about 500 ms, the count value “237” (237 × 2.235 ms = about 529.7 ms) of the number of interrupts is set. Therefore, "00000000000 (B)" is set as the B register value, and "11101101 (B)" is set as the C register value. That is, in order to execute the 2-byte time waiting process in step S108, the upper byte value of the waiting time is stored in the B register and the lower byte value is stored in the C register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S108, and the 2-byte time wait process (R_2BYTE_WAIT; FIG. 39) is executed. This process is a process of subtracting the BC register value for each interrupt and waiting until it becomes "0". This standby process is provided in order to prevent the replay display LED 79f from lighting immediately after the end of the game (step S111) and automatically betting immediately after the end of the game (step S114) (appearingly). , Because this is not desirable). As a result, the timing of automatic betting can be made appropriate.
Further, for example, at the time of winning a replay, it is possible to provide the player with the effect of winning the replay (including the sound effect at the time of winning the replay) by using the 2-byte time waiting process (2-byte time waiting process). During the game, the game progress is waited for (wait processing is executed), so the effect cannot be canceled).
Further, the bet sound at the time of automatic betting is output based on the commands stored in steps S112 and S113.

When the 2-byte waiting process is completed, the process proceeds to step S108 to read the number of stored sheets. Here, as described above, the stored number data is performed by reading the stored number display data at the address “F06F (H)” in FIG. 27. In the next step S109, it is determined whether or not the number of stored sheets is the limit number (50 sheets in the present embodiment). When it is determined that the number of sheets is the limit, the process proceeds to step S111, and when it is determined that the number of sheets is not the limit, the process proceeds to step S110.

In step S110, the blocker is controlled to be turned on, that is, to allow the acceptance of medals. Then, the process proceeds to step S111.
From the above, first, when the replay is not activated, the blocker 45 is always turned on to allow the acceptance of medals. This is because when the replay is not activated, even if the number of stored cards is the upper limit (50 cards) in the previous game, the bet medals (3 cards in the normal game) are consumed and the bet can be made for that amount. ..

Secondly, when the number of stored medals is not the limit during the replay operation, the blocker 45 is turned on to allow the acceptance of medals. This is because when the number of stored medals is not the limit number, at least the number of stored medals can be added by caring for the medals.
Thirdly, when the number of stored medals is the limit number during the replay operation, the blocker 45 is not turned on (the blocker 45 is maintained in the off state up to that point). This is because the medals cannot be bet and the number of stored medals cannot be added when the replay is activated and the number of stored medals is the upper limit, so that the medals are not accepted.

In step S111, the replay display LED is turned on. This process is a process of turning on (“1”) the D3 bit of the medal management flag (FIG. 25).
The process of actually turning on the replay display LED 79f is performed by the LED display control in step S606 in the interrupt process (FIG. 54) described later.
In this way, since the replay display LED 79f is lit after the 2-byte time wait process is executed in step S107, the replay display LED 79f is not lit at the moment the replay is displayed, but after the replay is displayed, the replay display LED 79f is lit. It will turn on after about 0.5 seconds.

Then, in the next step S112, an output request set process for transmitting a command indicating that the automatic bet has been made is performed on the sub control board 80, and a control command set 1 process is executed in the next step S113. ..
In the next step S114, a process of adding one medal (here, an automatic bet process), that is, an automatic bet (addition) of medals one by one in order to make an automatic bet based on the winning of the replay. Perform processing. In addition, based on the execution of the addition of one medal in step S114, the D0 to D2 bits of the bet number display LED signal data of the address "F012 (H)" are updated in FIG. 25. As a result, the lighting mode of the bet number display LEDs 79a to 79c is updated by the interrupt processing described later.

Next, the process proceeds to step S115, and the waiting time at the time of automatic betting based on the replay is set. In the present embodiment, in order to set the wait time of about 100 ms, the count value “46” (46 × 2.235 ms = about 103 ms) of the number of interrupts is set. Therefore, "00000000000 (B)" is set as the B register value, and "00101110 (B)" is set as the C register value. Next, the process proceeds to step S116, and the 2-byte time wait process is executed. This process is the process of subtracting the BC register value for each interrupt and waiting until it becomes "0" in the same manner as described above. When the 2-byte time waiting process of step S116 is completed, the process proceeds to step S117 to determine whether or not the medal limit number (3 in normal games) has been reached, and when it is determined that the medal limit number has been reached, this flowchart is used. End the process.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of medals has not reached the limit, the process returns to step S114, and the one medal addition (automatic bet) process is executed again.

As described above, in the automatic betting at the time of winning the replay, the 2-byte time waiting process of steps S115 and S116 is executed in accordance with the automatic betting of medals one by one. , Is executed every 100 ms. As a result, the bet number display LED signal data is also updated every time about 100 ms elapses. Therefore, it is possible to show the player that the bet display LEDs 79a to 79c are turned on sequentially (every time about 100 ms elapses). Further, when the automatic bet sound (sound such as “pullle”) is output from the speaker 22 on the sub control board 80 side, the change in lighting of the bet display LEDs 79a to 79c can be synchronized with the automatic bet sound. When the processes of steps S115 and S116 are not performed, it is possible to show the player that all the bet number display LEDs 79a to 79c are lit all at once.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a 2-byte time wait process (R_2BYTE_WAIT).
First, in step S521, it is determined whether or not the waiting time of 2 bytes has elapsed. This process determines the value of the BC register and determines whether or not it is "0" (whether or not the B register value is "0" and the C register value is "0"). Specifically, for example, when the B register value = "1" and the C register value = "0", it is determined that the value is not "0". Alternatively, when the B register value = "0" and the C register value = "0", it is determined that the value is "0".
When it is determined in step S521 that it is "0", the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S522.

In step S522, interrupt wait processing (C_INTR_WAIT; FIG. 40) is executed. This process is a process of waiting until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) elapses. Then, when the interrupt wait processing is completed, the process proceeds to step S523, the standby time update process is executed, and the process returns to step S521. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the BC register value. Specifically, for example, when the B register value = "1" and the C register value = "0", when "1" is subtracted, the B register value = "0" and the C register value = "255 (D)". It becomes. Alternatively, for example, when the B register value = "0" and the C register value = "1", subtracting "1" results in the B register value = "0" and the C register value = "0".

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing interrupt wait processing (C_INTR_WAIT).
First, in the interrupt counter value acquisition in step S531, the interrupt counter value is stored in the A register. Here, in the present embodiment, the interrupt counter value is stored as 16 bits (2-byte counter) at the two addresses "F081 (H)" and "F082 (H)" in FIG. 28, but in step S531 , The value stored in the address "F081 (H)" of the lower 8 bits is stored in the A register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S532, and it is determined whether or not the interrupt counter value (the value of the lower 8 bits stored in the address “F081 (H)”) has changed in FIG. 28. Specifically, when the process of subtracting the interrupt counter value stored in the address "F081 (H)" from the A register value is executed and the calculation result is "0" (zero flag = "1"), , Judge as "No". Then, when it is determined that the change has occurred, the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that the change has not occurred, the process of step S532 is continued.

Further, as described above, when an 8-bit value (1-byte counter) is used as the interrupt counter value, the interrupt counter value is stored only in the address "F081 (H)". Therefore, in step S531, the address "F081 (H)" is stored. ) ”Is stored in the A register, and in step S532, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the address“ F081 (H) ”has changed.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the blocker-on (MS_BLOCKER_ON) in step S110 and the like in FIG. 38.
First, in step S131, the main control board 50 checks the passage of the monitoring time when the blocker is turned on. Here, in FIG. 31, the monitoring time at the time of blocker on of the address “F027 (H)” is read. The timer value "45" is set when the passage sensor 43a is turned on (when a medal is detected), and this timer value is subtracted for each interrupt process. Then, in the next step S132, it is determined whether or not the blocker-on monitoring time has elapsed. Here, in FIG. 31, when the timer value of the address “F027 (H)” is “0”, it is determined that the blocker-on monitoring time has elapsed, and when it is not “0”, the blocker-on monitoring time has elapsed. Judge that there is no.

When it is determined that the blocker-on monitoring time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S133, and when it is determined that the blocker-on monitoring time has not elapsed, the process returns to step S131 and waits until it elapses.
The reason for controlling in this way is to prevent the medal from being pinched by the blocker 45. Specifically, if about 100 ms have passed since the medal was detected by the passage sensor 43a, the medal detected by the passage sensor 43a has already passed the blocker 45 (the medal has passed through the passage on the medal return side). This is because it can be judged. In other words, if the blocker 45 is driven within about 100 ms after the passage sensor 43a is turned on, the blocker 45 may pinch the medal detected by the passage sensor 43a.

In step S133, the main control board 50 prohibits interrupts from this point. As described above, the timer interrupt process is executed once every 2.235 ms during the execution of the main process, but the interrupt disable is released after the "interrupt disable" process in step S133 is executed. Until, it is controlled not to allow interrupts.

In the next step S134, the main control board 50 performs a process of turning on the blocker signal. This process is a process of storing data for setting the D6 bit signal of the output port 0 to “1”. Specifically, it is a process of setting the D6 bit (blocker signal) to "1" in the "blocker signal and hopper motor drive signal data" of FIG.
In this embodiment, information is output from the output port by interrupt processing (step S611 in FIG. 54, which will be described later). That is, instead of turning on the D6 bit of the output port 0 at the timing of step S134, in step S134, which is the main process, the blocker signal "1" is stored in the "blocker signal and hopper motor drive signal data" and interrupted. At the time of processing to output the output port 0 in the processing (step S611), the data is output based on the data stored in the RWM 53.

In the next step S135, the blocker state flag is turned on. Here, in FIG. 25, the process of turning on (“1”) the D2 bit of the medal management flag is performed. Then, the process proceeds to step S136, and the interrupt prohibition set in step S133 is canceled, that is, interrupts are permitted. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

In the above, the reason why an interrupt is not generated between the processes of steps S134 and S135 is as follows.
In the present embodiment, the blocker signal is turned on in step S134, and the blocker state is turned on in step S135. In this case, if an interrupt is inserted between step S134 and step S135, one is turned on and the other is turned off. Specifically, due to the interrupt processing entered in the middle, an inconsistency occurs in which the ON is output to the blocker 45 but the ON is not output to the ON display LED 79e (non-lighting). That is, in order to avoid such a state and update both values at once, it is possible to control so as not to cause confusion to the player by prohibiting interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, the processes are executed in the order of steps S134 and S135, but conversely, the processes may be in the order of steps S135 and S134.

Further, in the present embodiment, the blocker 45 is turned on after about 102 ms (“46” interrupt) has elapsed since the passage sensor 43a detects the medal, and the medal passage is formed. The reason for setting in this way is to prevent the blocker 45 from being turned on at the moment when the inserted medal (the medal detected by the passage sensor 43a) reaches the blocker 45 and the medal being pinched by the blocker 45. Therefore, after the passage sensor 43a detects the medal, the blocker 45 is controlled not to be turned on until a predetermined time (time in which the medal may be pinched) elapses.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the waiting for medal insertion (MS_STANDBY_DSP) in step S55 of FIG. 34.
First, in step S151, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the signal of the setting key switch 12 is on. Here, it is determined whether or not the rising data of the setting key switch 12 is ON (“1”) in the rising data of the input port 1. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S152, and if it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S161. That is, when the setting key switch 12 is turned on (when the setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion slot) in the medal insertion waiting state, the setting confirmation mode is set and the processes of steps S152 to S160 are executed. The setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the current set value is confirmed (the administrator visually confirms it), and the set value cannot be changed.

In the next step S152, the blocker 45 is turned off (MS_BLOCKER_OFF; FIG. 44). As a result, even if the medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 43, it is returned from the payout slot.
When executing the process of step S152, it is not determined in FIG. 31 whether or not the monitoring time at the time of blocker off has elapsed. This is because it is unlikely that the setting will be confirmed while inserting medals.
In the next step S153, the main control board 50 sets an output request at the start of setting value display. Then, in the next step S154, the control command set 1 is executed (the control command data at the start of setting value display is set).

Next, the process proceeds to step S155, and the main control board 50 performs a process of turning on the set value display LED 73 (digit 5). Here, in the present embodiment, an LED display request flag (not shown) that determines which digit can be turned on is provided, and the bit corresponding to the digit 5 of the LED display request flags is turned on (not shown). Execute the process to be set to "1"). As a result, the set value display LED 73 can be turned on and the current set value can be displayed. The process of actually turning on / off the set value display LED 73 is performed by the LED display control (step S606) in the interrupt process.

Next, the process proceeds to step S156, and it continues to determine whether or not the signal of the setting key switch 12 has been turned off. Contrary to step S151, this process determines whether or not the falling data of the D3 bit of the input port 1 has become "1". When it is determined that the signal of the setting key switch 12 is turned off, the process proceeds to step S157, and the main control board 50 executes a process of turning off the setting value display LED 73.

Next, the process proceeds to step S158, and the main control board 50 sets the output request at the end of the set value display. Then, in the next step S159, the control command set 1 is executed (the control command data at the end of setting value display is set).
In the next step S160, the main control board 50 performs a process of turning on the blocker (FIG. 41). Next, the process proceeds to step S161, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the game standby display start time has passed the "26846" interrupt (about 60 seconds) set in step S81 of FIG. 35. Here, in FIG. 31, it is determined whether or not the timer values of the addresses "F02A (H)" and "F02B (H)" are "0" (here, "072C (H)" is used as the initial value. It is assumed that it was memorized.) When it is determined to be "0", it is determined that the game standby display start time has elapsed, and when it is not "0", it is determined that the game standby display start time has not elapsed. When "082B (H)", which is obtained by adding "FF (H)" to "072C (H)", is stored as the timer value of the game standby display start time, the timer value is "00FF (H)". When the following, it is determined that the game standby display start time has elapsed.

When it is determined that the game standby display start time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S162, and a process of clearing the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is executed. This process is a process of updating the value of the acquired number of sheets data to "0" in FIG. 27. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed. On the other hand, in step S161, when it is determined that the game standby display start time has not elapsed, the process according to this flowchart ends.
From the above, in the present embodiment, when the game is not played for a predetermined time, the display of the acquired number display LED78 is cleared, but the stored number display LED76, the bet display LEDs 79a to 79c, and the replay display LED79f are not cleared. It is configured as follows. As a result, it is continuously displayed that the number of stored sheets that can be settled, that the bet is placed, and that the game can be replayed. Therefore, when the player tries to leave the seat, another player It is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the player has finished the game. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage of the player.

In addition, even after the player finishes the game (leaves the seat after performing settlement processing, etc.), the number of acquired sheets continues to be displayed, so that the player has finished the game to other players and hall related persons. The number of acquisitions has been cleared because it is confused with not making you feel that it is not (the player may still be trying to play the game).

As described above, by the processing of step S81 of FIG. 35 and steps S161 and S162 of FIG. 42, a timer of about 60 seconds is set at the start of the game, and when about 60 seconds have passed from the start of the game, the number of acquisitions is displayed. Clear the display contents of LED78 (set to "00").
As a result, for example, when the reels 31 are rotating or when all the reels 31 are stopped and the winning combination is not won (regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won), "00" is displayed on the winning number display LED 78. It is in a state. Further, for example, when the small winning combination 01 wins when all reels 31 are stopped, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 changes from "00" to "09".

In addition, although detailed processing is omitted, when a medal is inserted (when a medal maintenance bet or when a medal is automatically inserted at the time of replay winning), the display of the number of acquired medals is cleared.
Since the above control is an example, for example, when the reels 31 are rotating, when all reels 31 are stopped, when a winning combination is not won, or when a medal is inserted, the winning number display LED 78 is controlled so that nothing is displayed. You may.

Note that "clearing the display of the acquired number display LED78" means not only setting the display of the acquired number display LED78 to "00", but also setting it to "* 0" or "**" ( "*" Indicates that the light is off). In other words, it means that the display of the number of acquired sheets acquired by the player in the previous game is changed to another predetermined display.
Further, in the case of the specification in which the process for turning off the bet display LEDs 79a to 79c indicating the number of bets of the previous game (step S102 in FIG. 35) is not executed, when it is determined that the game standby display start time has elapsed, Clear processing for turning off the bet display LEDs 79a to 79c (specifically, processing for clearing the D0 to D2 bits of the bet number display LED data (_PT_MEDAL_LED) of the address "F012 (H)", or the bet number display LED data The process of clearing all of) may be executed.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the medal management process (MS_MEDAL_CHK) in step S56 of FIG. 34.
In FIG. 43, in step S171, the main control board 50 detects whether or not the blocker signal is on. When the blocker signal is on, the process proceeds to step S172, and when the blocker signal is not on, the process proceeds to step S173. Here, "the blocker signal is on" corresponds to the case where the medal passage is formed by the blocker 45. Here, in FIG. 25, it is detected whether or not the data of the D2 bit of the medal management flag is on.

In step S172, the main control board 50 detects whether or not the data of the input sensor signal is on. Here, it is determined whether or not either the D1 or D2 bit of the level data of the input port 2 is "1". When it is determined that the data of the insertion sensor signal is on, it means that the medal has been maintained and inserted. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S182 to execute the check process at the time of medal maintenance. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S173.
Although the details of the maintenance medal check process in step S182 are not shown, this process determines whether or not the insertion sensors 1 and 2 correctly detect the passage of the medal, and determines that the medal is correctly detected. If so, add "1" to the bet medal or the stored medal. On the other hand, when the insertion sensors 1 and 2 do not correctly detect the passage of the medal, a predetermined error display process is executed. Further, when the maintenance medal check process is executed, the D0 bit of the medal management flag (address "F011 (H)") is set to "0". As a result, it is possible to notify that the operation of the start switch 41 cannot be accepted.

In step S173, a request for checking whether or not the betting operation and the settlement operation of the 1-bet switch 40a and the 3-bet switch 40b can be accepted is set. Then, in the next step S174, it is checked whether or not these operations can be accepted.
Next, the process proceeds to step S175, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the operation can be accepted. When it is determined that the operation can be accepted, the process proceeds to step S176, and when it is determined that the operation cannot be accepted, the process according to this flowchart is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

By the processing of steps S173 to S175 above, it is possible to determine whether or not the operation of the 1-bet switch 40a, the 3-bet switch 40b and the settlement switch 46 can be accepted before performing the bet processing or the settlement processing. Only when it is in such a state, it shifts to bet processing or settlement processing. For example, by the processing of steps S173 to S175, the level data and rising data of input port 0 are read, and when the level data of input port 0 and rising data do not match, it is determined that the operation cannot be accepted. ..
In step S176, a confirmation request for the bet switch signal and the checkout switch signal is set. Here, the rising data of the input port 0 is read.

In the next step S177, based on the reading in step S176, it is determined whether or not any of the signals of the 1-bet switch 40a, the 3-bet switch 40b, and the settlement switch 46 rises. This process is a process of determining whether or not the D0, D1, and D2 bits of the rising data of the input port 0 read in step S173 are "1".
Specifically, for example, the read rising data of the input port 0 and "00000011 (B)" (definition data) are ANDed to clear the D3 to D7 bits. Then, it is determined whether or not the calculation result is "0".
When the calculation result is "0", it is determined that none of the signals rises (that is, it is determined that none of the 1-bet switch 40a, the 3-bet switch 40b and the settlement switch 46 has changed in operation). The process according to this flowchart is finished and the process returns to the main process.

When it is determined in step S177 that the calculation result is not "0", that is, when it is determined that there is a rise of any signal, the process proceeds to step S178. In step S178, the acceptance permission flag of the start switch 41 is cleared. This process is a process of setting the D0 bit of the medal management flag of FIG. 25 to “0”. When the D0 bit of the medal management flag is "0", the game start display LED 79d is turned off to indicate that the start switch 41 is not valid (it becomes invalid even if it is operated). On the other hand, when the D0 bit of the medal management flag is "1", the game start display LED 79d is turned on to indicate that the start switch 41 is enabled. The actual output of turning on / off the game start display LED 79d is executed in the interrupt process (step S606 in FIG. 54).

Therefore, when there is a change in any of the signals of the 1-bet switch 40a, the 3-bet switch 40b, or the checkout switch 46, the data of the medal management flag is used to notify that the start switch 41 is not allowed to be accepted. Is updated, and then a process based on the operation of the 1-bet switch 40a, the 3-bet switch 40b, or the settlement switch 46 (in FIG. 43, the settlement process (MS_MEDAL_RET) in step S181 or the storage bet process in step S183) is executed.
Note that the process based on the start switch 41 (for example, the winning combination lottery process) is executed in the main process, and the settlement process and the storage bet process are also executed in the main process. Therefore, for example, the process based on the start switch 41 during the settlement process. Is configured not to be executed.

Next, the process proceeds to step S179, and the main control board 50 sets a data confirmation request related to the settlement switch signal. The process here is a process of confirming whether the D0 bit of the rising data of the input port 0 is "0" or "1".
Then, in the next step S180, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a rise of the settlement switch signal based on the reading in step S179. In this process, in the rising data of the input port 0, when the D0 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no rising of the settlement switch signal, and when the D0 bit is "1", the rising of the settlement switch signal is Judge that there is.

When it is determined that the settlement switch signal rises, the process proceeds to step S181, and the settlement process (M_MEDAL_RET: FIG. 45) is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the settlement switch signal does not rise, it means that the bet switch signal rises, so the process proceeds to step S183 to execute the storage bet process.
The detailed flowchart of the storage bet processing will be omitted. The storage bet processing determines whether or not a storage medal is held, and if a storage medal is available and a bet is possible, the storage bet processing is executed.

In the above medal management process, it is determined in step S172 whether or not the data related to the input sensor signal is on, if it is on, the maintenance medal check proceeds, and if it is determined that it is not on, the bet switch signal or It is determined whether or not the data related to the settlement switch signal is on.
Therefore, since the physical medal insertion is checked with priority over the bet switch 40 and the checkout switch 46, it is possible to prevent the medal from being swallowed.

Here, "checking the insertion of physical medals with priority over the bet switch 40 and the settlement switch 46" is when the steps S53 to S58 of FIG. 34 are looped and the blocker signal is displayed. When is on, the data of RWM53 related to each input port is updated by interrupt processing, and either D1 or D2 bit level data of input port 2 is "1", and D0, D1 or of input port 0. A program in which "care medal check (step S182)" is easier to execute than "payment process (step S181)" or "storage bet process (step S183)" when any of the rising data of the D2 bit is "1". Refers to sequence or program processing.

Further, in step S180, the rising data of the settlement switch 46 is confirmed, and the execution of the subsequent processing (settlement processing or storage bet processing) is determined.
One of the reasons for this is that in the present embodiment, two switches, a 1-bet switch 40a and a 3-bet switch 40b, are provided as switches for executing the storage bet process, whereas the switch for executing the settlement process is provided. It has only one of the checkout switches 46. Therefore, it is possible to determine the settlement process or the storage bet process simply by determining whether or not the rising data of the D0 bit (specific bit) of the input port 0 is on. In other words, the process is simplified and the program capacity is reduced rather than determining "Is the D1 bit or the D2 bit on?".

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the blocker-off process (MS_BLOCKER_OFF) of step S152 and the like in FIG. 42. As described above, when the medal maintenance becomes impossible (acceptable) after the medal maintenance becomes effective, the blocker 45 is turned off and the medal maintained from the medal insertion slot 43 is paid out. Control to form a medal passage to return from.

First, in step S191, the main control board 50 performs a blocker signal confirmation process. Here, in FIG. 30, the D6 bit of the blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal data is confirmed.

Next, the process proceeds to step S192, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the blocker signal is off (the blocker signal data is “0”). When it is determined that it is not off, the process proceeds to step S193, and when it is determined that it is off, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. That is, when the blocker 45 is already off, the process according to this flowchart is terminated without proceeding with the process of turning off the blocker 45.

When it is determined in step S192 that the blocker signal is not off and the process proceeds to step S193, the main control board 50 prohibits interrupts from this point.
In the next step S194, the main control board 50 performs a process of turning off the blocker signal. This process is a process for setting the D6 bit of the output port 0 to “0”. Specifically, in the above blocker signal and hopper motor drive signal data, the D6 bit is set to "0". As a result, the D6 bit of the output port 0 becomes "0" at the time of the next interrupt processing. Further, in the next step S195, a process of turning off the blocker state is performed. This process is a process of setting the D2 bit of the medal management flag to “0” in FIG. 25.
Then, the process proceeds to step S196, and the interrupt prohibition set in step S193 is canceled, that is, interrupts are permitted. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

In the above processing, interrupts are not generated between the processing of steps S194 to S195, which is the same as in the blocker-on processing.
That is, if an interrupt is inserted between the process of turning off the blocker signal and the process of turning off the blocker state, one is turned off and the other is turned on. Interrupt processing is prohibited in order to update the value of.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the settlement process (M_MEDAL_RET) in step S181 of FIG. 43.
First, in step S211 it is determined whether the monitoring time at the time of blocker off has elapsed. This determination determines whether or not the timer value of "F026 (H)" in FIG. 31 is "0", and when it is determined to be "0", it is determined that the monitoring time has elapsed. When it is determined that the monitoring time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S211. Therefore, the settlement process is not executed until the monitoring time at the time of blocker off has elapsed. When it is determined that the monitoring time at the time of blocker off has not elapsed, the process is executed from step S57 in FIG.
In step S211 the output request at the start of settlement is set. Similar to step S70 of FIG. 34, this process is a process of storing information to be transmitted as a control command in the D register and the E register in order to transmit a control command to start settlement to the sub control board 80. is there. Specifically, "21 (H)" is stored in the D register and "55 (H)" is stored in the E register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S213, and it is determined whether or not the replay is in operation. In FIG. 26, this process determines whether or not the D0 bit of the operating state flag is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that the replay is in operation. When it is determined that the replay is in operation, the process proceeds to step S224, and when it is determined that the replay is not in operation, the process proceeds to step S214.
By this process, when it is determined that the replay operation is not in progress, the process proceeds to the process of step S214 and thereafter, and the bet medal settlement process is enabled. On the other hand, since there are no bet medals that can be settled during the replay operation, the process proceeds to step S224 and subsequent steps in order to enable the settlement of the stored medals.

In step S214, the bet medal is read. In this process, the address "F06B (H)" of the medal bet number data in FIG. 27 is stored in the HL register, and the address data indicated by the HL register value, that is, the medal bet number data is stored in the A register. Execute the process to be performed.
In the next step S215, it is determined whether or not the player has a bet medal. In this process, when the A register value is not "0", it is determined that there is a bet medal, and when it is "0", it is determined that there is no bet medal. If it is determined that there is a bet medal, the process proceeds to step S216, and if it is determined that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S224 (payment process of stored medals).

In step S216, the blocker off process (FIG. 44) is executed. That is, during the settlement process, the blocker 45 is turned off in order not to accept the insertion of medals. Here, the process proceeds to step S216 on condition that it is determined in step S211 that the monitoring time at the time of blocker off has elapsed. Therefore, when the blocker off in step S216 is executed, the blocker off monitoring time has always elapsed.
In the next step S217, the control command set 1 (FIG. 36) is executed. As a result, the control command to start the settlement of the bet medal is stored in the control command buffer. Further, by executing this control command set 1, the A register value and the HL register value are used in the control command set 2 (FIG. 37), so that the values are different from the values set in step S214.

In the next step S218, the bet medal is read. This process is the same as step S214. Since the A register value and the HL register value are different from those in the processing in step S214 due to the processing in step S217, the address of the bet number data is stored in the HL register again as in the processing in step S214, and the A register is stored. The data of the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in.

Next, the process proceeds to step S219, and one medal payout process (M_1MEDAL_PAY; FIGS. 46 to 47) is executed. This process is a process of driving the hopper motor 36 while detecting the payout sensors 1 and 2 to pay out one actual medal from the hopper 35. Next, the process proceeds to step S220 to read the bet medal. This process is the same as in step S214. Since the HL register is used in the process of paying out one medal in step S219, the value will be different from the HL register value set in step S218 after the end of step S219. Therefore, in step S220, the bet medal is read again. (Processing in which the address of the number of bets data is stored in the HL register and the data of the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register) is executed.

In the next step S221, the number of bet medals is subtracted by "1". That is, the A register value is subtracted by "1", and the A register value is stored in the address (F06B (H)) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the medal bet number data is updated. In the next step S222, the bet number display data is generated. This process is a process of updating the bet number display LED signal data in FIG. 25. The bet number display LED signal data is based on the number of bets.
Bet number display LED signal data (when one bet is inserted): 00000001 (B)
Bet number display LED signal data (when two bets are inserted): 000000111 (B)
Bet number display LED signal data (when 3 bets are inserted): 00000111 (B)
It has become.
Therefore, immediately before step S222, when the bet number display LED signal data is "00000011 (B)" at the time of betting three bets, the calculation is performed so as to be the bet number display LED signal data at the time of betting two bets. It is set to "00000011 (B)". Here, by issuing an instruction to shift one to the right (an instruction that is not rotate), "00000011 (B)" → "00000011 (B)".

Next, the process proceeds to step S223 to determine whether or not the bet medal has been settled. This process determines whether or not the A register value stored in the bet medal number data at this point is "0", and if it is not "0", it is determined that the bet medal settlement has not been completed. , If it is "0", it is judged that the settlement of the bet medal is completed. When it is determined that the bet medal settlement has not been completed, the process returns to step S218, and the bet medal settlement is continued. On the other hand, when it is determined that the settlement of the bet medal is completed, the process proceeds to step S234.

When the process proceeds to step S234, the settlement process ends without the settlement of the stored medals thereafter. Therefore, when holding the stored medal, the settlement switch 46 is operated again to perform the settlement process.
That is, in the example of FIG. 45, when the settlement switch 46 is operated, only the settlement of the bet medal is executed when the bet medal is held, and the settlement of the stored medal is not executed even when the storage medal is held. In this case, when the settlement switch 46 is operated again, the settlement process of the stored medals is executed.
Not limited to such a two-step settlement process, when it is determined in step S223 that the settlement of bet medals has been completed, the process may proceed to step S224 and the settlement of stored medals may be started. That is, when the settlement switch 46 is operated and both bet medals and stored medals are held, the settlement processing of all medals may be executed.

If it is determined in step S213 that the replay is not in operation, or if it is determined in step S215 that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S224.
In step S224, the stored number data is acquired. In FIG. 27, this process stores the value of the address "F06F (H)" that stores the stored number display data in the HL register, and stores the data of the address indicated by the HL register value, that is, the stored number display data. This is a process of storing in the A register. In the next step S225, it is determined whether or not the player has a stored medal. This determination determines whether or not the A register value is "0". When it is determined that there is a stored medal, the process proceeds to step S226, and when it is determined that there is no stored medal, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S226, the blocker 45 is turned off as in step S216. Then, in the next step S227, the control command set 1 is executed in the same manner as in step S217. This process is a process of storing the control command in the control command buffer in order to transmit the control command for settlement of stored medals to the sub-control board 80.
Next, the process proceeds to step S228, and a process of turning on the effect display LED 79 g is performed. This process is a process of setting the D4 bit of the medal management flag to “1” in FIG. 25. After the D4 bit of the medal management flag becomes "1", the interrupt process (FIG. 54) is executed, and when it is the lighting timing of the digit 5, the effect display LED 79g is lit in step S606.

Next, the process proceeds to step S229, and the stored number display data is acquired again. In this process, as in step S224, the address "F06F (H)" of the stored number display data is stored in the HL register, and the data of the address indicated by the HL register value (stored number display data) is stored in the A register. Is. This is because, similarly to the above, since the control command set 1 is executed in step S227, the HL register value and the A register value are different from the time point in step S224.

Next, the process proceeds to step S230, and the one medal payout process (M_1MEDAL_PAY; FIGS. 46 to 47) is executed in the same manner as in step S219. Then, in the next step S231, "1" is subtracted from the stored number display data. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the A register value and storing the subtracted A register value at the address (F06F (H)) indicated by the HL register value. By this process, the stored number display data is updated.
In the next step S232, it is determined whether or not the settlement of the stored medals has been completed. This processing energy determines whether or not the A register value after subtraction is "0" in step S231, and if it is "0", it is determined that the settlement of the stored medals is completed, and if it is not "0". Judges that the settlement of the stored medals has not been completed. If the settlement of the stored medals has not been completed, the process returns to step S229 to continue the settlement of the stored medals. On the other hand, when it is determined that the settlement of the stored medals is completed, the process proceeds to step S233.

In step S233, the effect display LED is turned off. This process is the reverse of step S28. That is, in FIG. 25, the process of setting the D4 bit of the medal management flag to “0” is executed.
In the next step S234, the main control board 50 sets an output request at the end of settlement. Specifically, "21 (H)" is stored in the D register and "71 (H)" is stored in the E register. Then, in the next step S235, the control command set 1 is executed. Further, the process proceeds to the next step S236, and the process of turning on the blocker 45 (FIG. 41) is executed. Therefore, after the settlement process is completed, the blocker 45 is turned on and medals can be inserted. Here, after the process of turning on the blocker 45 is completed, the process is executed from step S57 of FIG. 34.

46 and 47 are flowcharts showing the one medal payout process (M_1MEDAL_PAY) in steps S219 and S230 in FIG. 45. FIG. 47 is a flowchart following FIG. 46.
Before executing step S251, which is the start of the one medal payout process, the AF registers (A register and F register) are saved in the stack area (a part of the storage area of the RWM 53), although not shown in the flowchart. Then, before step S273, which will be described later, the AF register saved in the stack area is restored. In step S251 of FIG. 46, the main control board 50 is set to have not detected an error. That is, the state in which no error is detected is set in the initial state. In the next step S252, the main control board 50 sets a medal jam error display request.
The medal jam error is referred to as an "HP error" in the present embodiment, and when this medal jam error occurs, a process of displaying "HP" on the acquired number display LED 78 is executed.
The "error" here means a recoverable error. When a recoverable error occurs, the error content is displayed and the process is stopped. However, when the hall clerk executes the error canceling operation (removes the error cause) and operates the reset switch 14, whether or not the error is cleared. If it is determined that the error has been cleared, the process is restarted.

Next, the process proceeds to step S253, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not an error has been detected. When it is determined that an error has been detected, the process proceeds to step S254 to display an error. Then, the process proceeds to step S255. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S253 that no error has been detected, the process proceeds to step S255.

In step S255, the main control board 50 sets the control time of the medal payout device 35. In FIG. 31, this process is performed when "2686 (D)" (or "255 (D)" is added to the medal payout device control time of the addresses "F028 (H)" and "F029 (H)", "2941 (. D) ”) is the process of setting. When the medal payout device control time is set here, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt thereafter.
Next, the process proceeds to step S256 to perform a process for driving the hopper motor 36. Specifically, in FIG. 30, it is a process of setting the D7 bit of the blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal data to “1”. As a result, the D7 bit of the output port 0 becomes "1" at the time of the next interrupt processing.
Then, in the next step S257, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the medal payout device control time has elapsed a predetermined time. In this process, whether or not the timer value of the medal payout device control time is "0" (when "FF (H)" is not added), or whether or not it is "00FF (H)" or less ( When "FF (H)" is added), and when it is "0" or "00FF (H)" or less, it is determined that the medal payout device control time has elapsed. When it is determined that the medal payout device control time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S260, and when it is determined that the medal payout device control time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S258.

In step S260, a process for turning off the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is performed. Specifically, in FIG. 30, the D7 bit of the blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal data is set to “0”. As a result, at the time of the next interrupt processing, the D7 bit of the output port 0 becomes “0”. Then, in the next step S261, the detection time of the payout sensor 1 is set. This process is a process of setting the timer value “46” to the payout sensor check time of the address “F023 (H)” in FIG. 31. Next, the process proceeds to step S262, and it is determined whether or not the payout sensor 1 signal is turned on. Here, in FIG. 23, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit of the input port 2 level data is “1”. When it is determined that the payout sensor 1 signal is turned on, the process proceeds to step S255, and when it is determined that the payout sensor 1 signal is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S263.

In step S263, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the detection time of the payout sensor 1 has elapsed a predetermined time. This process determines whether or not the timer value (payout sensor check time of the address "F023 (H)") set in step S261 has become "0", and when it is determined that it has become "0", the payout It is determined that one hour has passed from the sensor, and the process proceeds to step S264. On the other hand, when it is determined that the payout sensor 1 hour is not "0", the process returns to step S262. In step S264, the main control board 50 sets a request for displaying a medal empty error. The medal empty error is referred to as "HE error" in the present embodiment, and when this medal empty error occurs, a process of displaying "HE" on the acquired number display LED 78 is executed. Then, the process proceeds from step S253 to step S254 to execute the error display.
That is, if the payout sensor 1 does not detect a medal even if the hopper motor 36 is driven, it is determined that the hopper 35 does not have a medal.

In step S257, it is determined that the medal payout control time has elapsed, and when the process proceeds to step S258, it is determined whether or not the payout sensor 1 signal is turned on. Here, in FIG. 23, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit of the input port 2 level data is “1”. When it is determined that the payout sensor 1 signal is turned on, the process proceeds to step S259, and when it is determined that the payout sensor 1 signal is not turned on, the process returns to step S257.
In step S259, the detection time of the payout sensor 1 is set. This process is a process of setting the timer value “46” to the payout sensor check time of the address “F023 (H)” in FIG. 31. Then, the process proceeds to step S265.

In step S265, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a medal jam has been detected. This process causes medal clogging when the timer value of the payout sensor 1 detection time set in step S259 becomes "0" before the signal on of the payout sensors 1 and 2 is detected in step S267, which will be described later. It is judged that it has been detected. When it is determined that the medal jam is detected, the process proceeds to step S252, and when it is determined that the medal jam is not detected, the process proceeds to step S266.
In step S266, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 1 signal is on. Similar to step S258, this process determines whether or not the D3 bit of the input port 2 level data is “1” in FIG. 23. When it is determined that the payout sensor 1 signal is turned on, the process proceeds to step S267, and when it is determined that the payout sensor 1 signal is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S257.

In step S267, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensors 1 and 2 signals are on. This process determines whether or not both the D3 bit and the D4 bit of the input port 2 level data are "1" in FIG. 23. When it is determined that the payout sensor 1 and 2 signals are on (both bits are "1"), the process proceeds to step S268, and when it is determined that the payout sensors 1 and 2 signals are not on, the process returns to step S265.
In step S268, the detection time of the payout sensor 2 is set. This process is a process of setting the timer value “46” to the payout sensor check time of the address “F023 (H)” in FIG. 31. Then, the process proceeds to step S269 (FIG. 47).

In step S269, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a medal jam has been detected. In this process, when the timer value becomes "0" before detecting the payout sensor 2 signal off in step S270, or before the payout sensor 1 signal off is detected in step S272, the timer value becomes "0". When it becomes "0", it is determined that a medal jam has been detected. When it is determined that the medal jam is detected, the process proceeds to step S252, and when it is determined that the medal jam is not detected, the process proceeds to step S270.

In step S270, it is determined whether or not the payout sensor 2 signal is turned off. This process determines whether or not the D4 bit of the input port 2 level data is "0" in FIG. 23. When it is determined that the payout sensor 2 signal is off, the process proceeds to step S271, and when it is determined that the payout sensor 2 signal is not off, the process returns to step S269.
In step S271, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the medal payout is invalid. If it is determined that it is invalid, the process proceeds to step S257, and if it is determined that it is not invalid, the process proceeds to step S272. In step S272, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 1 signal is off. This process determines whether or not the D3 bit of the input port 2 level data is "0" in FIG. 23. When it is determined that the payout sensor 1 signal is off, the process proceeds to step S273, and when it is determined that the payout sensor 1 signal is not off, the process returns to step S269.

In step S273, the remaining payout number (count value) is subtracted by "1". As described above, the AF register saved in the stack area is restored before step S273. Then, in step S273, the process of subtracting "1" from the data stored in the A register is executed.
Next, the process proceeds to step S274, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the medal payout has been completed. This process determines whether or not the A register value after subtracting "1" is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the medal payout is completed.

When it is determined that the medal payout has been completed, the process proceeds to step S275, and when it is determined that the medal payout has not been completed, the present flowchart is terminated. In step S275, the main control board 50 performs a process for turning off the drive signal of the hopper motor 36. Specifically, in FIG. 30, the D7 bit of the blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal data is set to “0”. As a result, the D7 bit of the output port 0 becomes "0" at the time of the next interrupt processing (an off signal is output as a hopper drive signal). Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

In the example of FIG. 46, when it is determined in step S257 that the medal payout device control time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S260 to turn off the hopper motor drive signal, and then the payout sensor 1 detection time is set in step S261. did. Then, when the payout sensor 1 detection time elapses before detecting the on of the payout sensor 1 signal (“Yes” in step S263), the process proceeds to step S264 to set the HE error.
However, not limited to the above processing, when it is determined in step S257 that the medal payout device control time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S260 to turn off the hopper motor drive signal, and then proceeds to step S264 to cause an HE error. You may set it. That is, if the payout sensor 1 signal is not detected until the medal payout device control time has elapsed, an HE error may be immediately generated.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the start switch check process (M_START_CHK) in step S58 of FIG. 34.
First, in step S281, it is determined whether or not the specified numbers match. This process reads the number of medals bet at this point from the medal bet number data in FIG. 27, and determines whether or not the number is "3" during a normal game, for example. When it is determined that the number of bets and the specified number match, the process proceeds to step S282, and when it is determined that they do not match, the process returns to step S53 (FIG. 34). By this process, if the specified number of medals are not bet, the start switch check process does not proceed even if the start switch 41 is operated (the game is not started).

In step S282, it is determined whether or not the monitoring time at the time of blocker off has elapsed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) In FIG. 25, the address “F011 (H)” of the medal management flag is stored in the HL register.
(2) In FIG. 31, it is determined whether or not the timer value of the blocker-off monitoring time at the address “F026 (H)” is “0”, and if it is “0”, the blocker-off monitoring time has elapsed. to decide.
When it is determined that the blocker-off monitoring time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S284, and when it is determined that the blocker-off monitoring time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S283.
In step S283, the game start display LED signal is turned off. This process is a process of setting the address indicated by the HL register value, that is, the D0 bit of “F011 (H)” in FIG. 25 to “0”. Then, the process returns to step S53 (FIG. 34).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S282 that the monitoring time at the time of blocker off has elapsed and the process proceeds to step S284, the game start display LED signal is turned on. This process is a process of setting the address indicated by the HL register value, that is, the D0 bit of "F011 (H)" to "1". Then, the process returns to step S53 (FIG. 34).
Next, the process proceeds to step S285, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. In FIG. 21, this process determines whether or not the D3 bit of the input port 0 rising data is “1”, and if it is “1”, it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to the start switch acceptance (MS_START_CTL; FIG. 49) in step S59. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start switch 41 is not operated, the process returns to step S53.

When the process proceeds to accept the start switch in step S59, the blocker 45 is turned off in step S294 of FIG. 49. Therefore, in step S282, the blocker 45 is turned off on condition that it is determined that the monitoring time at the time of blocker off has elapsed. Therefore, in the flow of FIG. 49, it is not determined whether or not the blocker-off monitoring time has elapsed immediately before the blocker-off in step S294 is executed.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the start switch acceptance (MS_START_CTL) in step S59 in FIGS. 34 and 48.
In step S291, the built-in random number is stored in the MPU register (random number soft latch register). Here, the random number is latched (acquired), and it is in step S60 of FIG. 34 to determine whether or not the acquired random number is a random number corresponding to the winning combination.
In the next step S292, the start switch acceptance permission flag is cleared. That is, in FIG. 25, the D0 bit of the medal management flag is cleared (set to "0").
Next, the process proceeds to step S293, and the setting change permission flag is cleared. In this process, the D6 bit of the medal management flag is set to "1" in FIG. 25. This makes it impossible to change the settings.

In the next step S294, the blocker 45 is turned off (FIG. 44). That is, after the operation of the start switch 41, it is controlled so that even if a medal is inserted, it is not accepted. In the next step S295, the bet medal is read. The number of bet medals read here is stored in the A register. In the next step S296, the main control board 50 sets an output request for reel rotation disclosure. Here, "13 (H)" is set in the D register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S297, and the number of bet medals (A register value) read in step S295 is set in the E register.

In the next step S298, the control command set 1 is executed. This process is a process of storing the information of the D register and the E register set in steps S296 and S297 in the control command buffer.
Next, the process proceeds to step S299, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the set value stored in the predetermined address (not shown) of the RWM 53 is within the normal range (1 to 6). When it is determined that the range is normal, the process proceeds to step S300, and when it is determined that the range is not normal, the process proceeds to step S305 to execute the unrecoverable error processing (E6 error).

In step S300, the bet medal is read. Then, the read number of bet medals is stored in the A register. Although the bet medal is read in step S295, the A register value changes depending on the control command set 1 in step S298, so the bet medal is read again.
At the time of winning the replay, the number of automatically bet medals is set as the number of bet medals. Next, the process proceeds to step S301, and the number of read bet medals is doubled. This process is a process of adding the A register value and the A register value and storing the added value in the A register. Further, in FIG. 27, the address (F070 (H)) of the number of times the medal bet signal is output is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S302, interrupt processing is prohibited. Next, the process proceeds to step S303, and the number of times the medal bet signal is output is set. In this process, the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (the number of medal bet signal outputs) and the A register (the number of bet medals after doubling) are added, and the added value is stored in the A register. It is a process to do. Further, the value of the A register is stored in the address (F070 (H)) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the number of times the medal bet signal is output is updated. Then, the process proceeds to step S304, the interrupt processing is permitted, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

The above steps S302 to S304 prohibit interrupts before and after updating the number of times the medal bet signal is output. By disabling the interrupt, it is possible to prevent the interrupt process from being executed during the update of the medal bet signal and the process of updating the number of times the medal bet signal is output from being executed. That is, after the process of updating the number of times the medal bet signal is output is completed, the interrupt process is permitted and the medal bet signal is updated.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the medal bet signal is output, the actual number of medal bets is doubled and the value is set as the number of outputs. In this way, as described above, when the medal bet signal is output to the outside as a pulse signal that repeats on and off, the number of medal bets is represented by two times of on and off. This is to control. This also applies when paying out medals. When outputting the medal payout signal to the outside, the number of medal payouts is doubled, the value is set to the number of medal payout signal output times, and one medal payout number is represented by turning on and off twice. Control.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the reel rotation start preparation (M_REEL_READY) in step S63 in FIG. 34.
In step S311 it is determined whether or not the minimum gaming period has elapsed. In this process, whether or not the timer value of the minimum game time of the addresses "F02C (H)" and "F02D (H)" in FIG. 31 is "0"("FF(H)" is not added). When) or whether or not it is "00FF (H)" or less (when "FF (H)" is added). In the present embodiment, the minimum game time (the minimum time from the start of rotation of the reel 31 to the start of rotation of the reel 31 in the next game) is set to about 4.1 seconds.

When it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S312, and the minimum game time is set. This process is a process of setting the timer value of the minimum game time to the addresses "F02C (H)" and "F02D (H)" in FIG. As described above, the timer value to be set is "072C (H)" corresponding to "1836 (D)", or "082B (H)" (2091) obtained by adding "FF (H)" to this value. (Equivalent to (D)). Therefore, when the minimum game time is set in step S312, the timer value is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt from this point, and whether or not the timer value is "0" in step S311 in the next game ( Whether or not "FF (H)" is not added) or "00FF (H)" or less (when "FF (H)" is added) is determined.

In the next step S313, the condition device number is acquired. In this process, the accessory condition device number of the address “F084 (H)” in FIG. 28 is stored in the H register, and the winning and replay condition device number of the address “F083 (H)” is stored in the L register. It is a process.
In the condition device information output bit set in the next step S314, the process of setting the D7 bit of the H register to “1” and the D6 bit of the L register to “1” is performed. This process is a process of creating the bonus condition device information from the bonus condition device number and creating the winning and replay condition device information from the winning and replay condition device numbers.
In the present embodiment, among the upper two bits of the condition device information, when the D7 bit is "1", it means that it is the accessory condition device information, and when the D6 bit is "1", it means winning and replaying. It is set to point to the condition device information (see FIG. 29).

Next, the process proceeds to step S315 to save the condition device information. In this process, the H register value is stored in the accessory condition device information of the address "F092 (H)" in FIG. 29, and the L register value is stored in the winning and replay condition device information of the address "F091 (H)". It is a process to memorize.
Next, the process proceeds to step S316, and the condition device information output time is saved. This process is a process of storing the timer value “25” in the conditional device output time of the address “F024 (H)” in FIG. 31. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the accessory condition device information and the winning and replay condition device information are output to the outside (testing machine) during “24 × 2.235 ms = 53.64 ms”. The condition device output time set here is subtracted by "1" from the next interrupt process (FIG. 54) in step S605 described later.
The condition device information is information to be output to the testing machine, and is not actually output in the market. However, the ROM 54 that stores the program processing required for output and the RWM53 (storage area) that can store the information that is the source of the condition device information and the output time of the condition device information are also provided in the slot machine 10 on the market. ing. In other words, the ROM 54 and RWM 53 included in the slot machine 10 on the market execute the process for outputting the conditional device information, but the conditional device information is not output.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the reel stop control (M_REEL_STOP) in step S65 in FIG. 34.
First, in step S321, the number of shifted frames is created. The number of staggered frames is synonymous with the number of slipped frames. This process is created before the stop reception is executed, based on the lottery result (winning number) of the combination (condition device) by the combination lottery means 61. In addition, it is created for all the stop symbol numbers that may be stopped.

Although not shown, the RWM 53 has a storage area for a total of 60 (60 bytes) shifted frames for all 20 symbol numbers (0 to 19) for the three reels 31.
Then, as a general rule, the value obtained by adding the number of shifted frames to the stop reception symbol number becomes the stop symbol number.
Further, for example, after the left reel is stopped, the number of shifted frames of the middle reel and the right reel is recreated based on the stop reception symbol number or the stop symbol number of the left reel.

In the next step S322, it is determined whether or not the stop reception is possible. In this process, for all reels 31, the left reel symbol number (for passing position), the middle reel symbol number (for passing position), and the right reel symbol number (for passing position) in FIG. 28 are set to "0" to "0" to ". Check whether the symbol number of "19 (D)" is stored, and if the symbol number of "0" to "19 (D)" is stored, judge "Yes" and "FF (H)". ) ”Is stored, it is judged as“ No ”. As described above, in the reel symbol number (for the passing position), "FF (H)" is stored when the reel sensor has not passed. When it is determined in step S322 that the stop reception is possible, the process proceeds to step S323, and when it is determined that the stop reception is not possible, the process proceeds to step S328.
In step S323, it is determined whether or not the reel stop reception waiting time has elapsed. In this process, the reel stop reception waiting time at the address “F022 (H)” is read in FIG. 31, and when the timer value is “0”, it is determined that the waiting time has elapsed. When it is determined that the waiting time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S324, and when it is determined that the waiting time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to 328. During this waiting time, a new number of shifted frames and the like are calculated, and the calculated number of shifted frames can be saved in the RWM 53.

In step S324, it is determined whether or not the rise of the stop switch signal is detected. In this process, in FIG. 21, it is determined whether or not the D5 to D7 bits of the input port 0 rising data are "1", and when it is determined that any of them is "1", the stop switch 42 is set. Judge that it has been operated. When it is determined that the rise of the stop switch signal is detected, the process proceeds to step S326, and when it is determined that the rise of the stop switch signal is not detected, the process proceeds to step S325.
In step S325, it is determined whether or not the stop operation of all reels 31 has been performed. When it is determined that the stop operation of all reels 31 has been performed, the process proceeds to step S328, and when it is determined that the stop operation of all reels 31 has not been performed, the process returns to step S324.

Proceeding from step S324 to step S326, the reel stop acceptance start time is set. This process is a process of setting "7" in the reel stop reception waiting time of the address "F022 (H)" in FIG. 31. Therefore, when "7" is set in the reel stop reception standby time at this point, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt in the subsequent interrupt processing. Then, until the reel stop reception waiting time becomes "0", it is determined as "No" in step S323, and after it becomes "0", it is determined as "Yes" in step S323.

After step S326, the process proceeds to step S327 to save the stop position. This process is a process of saving the reel symbol number (for the stop position) in FIG. 28 for the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42. As described above, the value obtained by adding the number of shifted frames to the stop reception symbol number is defined as the stop symbol number. Therefore, this step S327 is performed for all of the left, middle, and right reels 31, and each time the left, middle, and right stop switches 42 are operated, the left reel symbol numbers (in FIG. 28) and the left reel symbol numbers ( The stop position), middle reel symbol number (for stop position), and right reel symbol number (for stop position) are stored.

Next, the process proceeds to step S328, and the stopped states of all reels are checked. In this process, it is determined whether or not the status of all reels 31 is in the stopped state. When the stop switch 42 is operated, the rotating reel 31 does not stop at that moment, but stops after the deceleration process of the motor 32. Therefore, in step S328, it is determined whether or not all the reels 31 are in the stopped state regardless of whether or not they are actually stopped. Whether or not all the reels 31 have actually stopped is determined in the next step S329.

In the next step S329, it is checked whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped. When it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped (the status of all reels is in the stopped state), the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that all reels 31 have not stopped, the process returns to step S321.
Here, as described above, in the creation of the number of shifted frames in the first step S321, all the symbol numbers of the left, middle, and right reels 31 are created, but any one of the stop switches 42 is operated. When the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is stopped, when the process returns from step S329 to step S321, the number of shifted frames is newly created for all the symbol numbers of the remaining reels.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning a prize in step S68 of FIG. 34.
First, in step S341, an output request at the start of medal payout is set. This process is a process of storing information indicating the number of acquired (paid out) sheets in a predetermined register. Specifically, it is a process of storing "22 (H)" in the D register and the number of acquired (paid out) sheets in the E register. In the next step S342, the control command set 1 is executed. This process is a process of storing control commands in the control command buffer of RWM53.
Next, the process proceeds to step S343, and the medal number setting process is executed. This process executes the following process.
(1) In the D register, the medal payout number data of the address “F06C (H)” in FIG. 27 is stored.
(2) The medal bet number data of the address "F06B (H)" in FIG. 27 is stored in the E register.
In the next step S344, the operation flag is checked. This process is a process of determining on / off of each bit of the operating state flag in FIG. 26.

Next, the process proceeds to step S345, and it is determined whether or not 1BB is in operation. In the present embodiment, the operating state flag of 1BB is determined depending on whether or not the D3 bit of the operating state flag is "1". Then, when it is determined that the operating state flag of 1BB is "1", the process proceeds to step S346, and when it is determined that the operating state flag of 1BB is not "1", the process proceeds to step S350.
In step S346, the data on the number of sheets that can be acquired when 1BB is operated is acquired. This process is a process of storing the data of the number of sheets that can be acquired at the time of 1BB operation stored in the predetermined address (not shown) of the RWM53 in the A register. Then, in the next step S347, it is determined whether or not the acquisition number upper limit value at the time of 1BB operation has been reached. Here, the information in the D register (data on the number of medals paid out) is subtracted from the value stored in the A register, the calculation result is stored in the A register, and the value stored in the A register is not negative (carry flag ≠ "1". ") Judge whether or not. When it is determined that it is not negative, it is determined as "No" (the upper limit of the number of acquired sheets at the time of 1BB operation has not been reached).

When it is determined that the upper limit of the number of acquired sheets at the time of 1BB operation has been reached, the process proceeds to step S348, and when it is determined that the value has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S349.
In step S348, the number of sheets that can be obtained when 1BB is operated is cleared. This process is a process of performing an "XOR" operation on the A register value and the A register value, and storing the operation result in the A register. By this arithmetic processing, the A register value is always "0". Then, the process proceeds to step S349.
In step S349, the number of sheets that can be acquired when 1BB is operated is updated. Specifically, the A register value is stored in the number of sheets that can be acquired when 1BB of the RWM53 is operated. Then, the process proceeds to step S350.

In step S350, the number of medals to be paid out is set. This process is a process of storing the E register value (medal bet number data) in the A register. As a result, the medal bet number data is stored in the A register.
In the next step S251, it is determined whether or not the replay is displayed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the D0 bit (replay) of the symbol combination display flag is "1" in FIG. 26. Then, when the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is "1" (when the replay is displayed), the process proceeds to step S353, and when it is determined that the replay is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S352.

In step S352, the number of medals to be paid out is set. This process is a process of storing the D register value (medal payout number data) in the A register. As a result, the medal payout number data is stored in the A register.
By the above processing, at the time of replay winning, the A register value becomes the medal bet number data value set in step S343, and when it is not at the time of replay winning (that is, at the time of small winning combination winning), the A register value is set at step S352. It is the data value of the number of medals to be paid out.
Next, the process proceeds to step S353, and a process of doubling the number of medals stored in the A register is executed. The reason for doubling is to transmit the doubling payout signal as described above. This process is a process of adding the A register value and the A register value and storing the added value in the A register. Further, the address of the number of times the medal payout signal is output, that is, "F071 (H)" shown in FIG. 27 is stored in the HL register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S354 to disable interrupt processing. In the next step S355, the number of times the medal payout signal is output is set. This process is a process of adding the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value and the A register value, and storing the added value in the A register. By this process, the value of the number of times the medal payout signal is output is updated. In the next step S356, interrupt processing is permitted.
By the above processing, interrupt processing is prohibited before and after updating the value of the medal payout signal output count.
By disabling the interrupt, it is possible to prevent the interrupt process from being executed during the update of the medal payout signal and the process of updating the medal payout signal output number of times from being executed. That is, after the process of updating the medal payout signal output number of times is completed, the interrupt process is permitted and the medal payout signal is allowed to be updated.

Further, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of medals to be paid out is set to 10, but there is a possibility that the number of medals to be paid out will be updated by the next game during the output of the medal payout signal accompanying the payout of 10 medals. Low. However, if the number of medals to be paid out is changed during the development process (for example, the maximum number of medals to be paid out is changed from 10 to 15), the number of medals to be paid out may be updated while the medal payout signal is being output. There is. Here, if interrupt prohibition processing is provided as in the present embodiment, even if the number of medals paid out is changed (for example, up to 15) during development, the change in the program can be reduced.

Further, in step S355, it is meaningful to set the number of times the medal payout signal is output before the actual medal payout process. Specifically, the number of times the medal payout signal is output is created from the medal payout number data except when the replay is won. At this time, if the payout process (step S357 or later in FIG. 52) is performed before setting the medal payout signal output number of times, the medal payout number data is updated and the correct number of medal payout signals are not output. This is because there is a risk that it will end up.

In the next step S357, it is determined whether or not there is a medal payout. In the process here, "1" is subtracted from the D register value (medal payout number data), and it is determined whether or not the value after the subtraction is "0". When it is "0", it is determined that there is no medal payout. When it is determined that there is a medal payout, the process proceeds to step S358, and when it is determined that there is no medal payout, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S358, the number of stored sheets is read. This process is a process of reading the value of the stored number display data of the address “F06F (H)” in FIG. 27. Next, the process proceeds to step S359, and it is determined whether or not the number of medals stored has reached the limit value. When the value of the read stored number display data is "50", it is determined that the stored number has reached the limit value, and the process proceeds to step S363. When it is determined that the stored number has not reached the limit, step S360 is performed. move on.

In step S360, the waiting time at the time of adding the stored medals is set. In the present embodiment, similarly to step S115 of FIG. 38, in order to set the wait time of about 100 ms, the count value “46” (46 × 2.235 ms = about 100 ms) of the number of interrupts is set. Therefore, "00000000000 (B)" is set in the B register and "00101110 (B)" is set in the C register. Next, the process proceeds to step S361, and the 2-byte time wait process (FIG. 39) is executed. As described above, this process is a process of subtracting the BC register value for each interrupt and waiting until it becomes “0”. When the 2-byte time waiting process of step S361 is completed, the process proceeds to step S362 to execute the addition of one stored sheet. This process is a process of adding "1" to the stored number display data of the address "F06F (H)" in FIG. 27. Then, the process proceeds to step S364.
On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S359 to step S363, one medal payout process (FIG. 46) is executed. By the above processing, the number of stored sheets (stored number display data) is added until the number of stored sheets reaches the limit value, and when the number of stored sheets reaches the limit value, the actual medal is paid out from the hopper 35 (medals). Execute the one-sheet payout process).

In step S364, the number of acquisitions is displayed as "+1". This process is a process of adding "1" to the acquired number of sheets data in FIG. 27. As a result, for example, when the previous display is "02", the display is updated to "03".
In the next step S365, in FIG. 27, a process of subtracting "1" from the medal payout number data is performed. Next, the process proceeds to step S366, and it is determined whether or not the medal payout is completed. This process determines whether or not the updated medal payout number data is "0". When it is determined that the medal payout number data is "0", the process proceeds to step S367, and when it is determined that the medal payout number data is not "0", the process returns to step S358.

In step S367, an output request at the end of medal payout is set. This process is a process of storing a command indicating the end of medal payout in a register. In the next step S368, the control command set 1 is executed. This process is a process of storing control commands in the control command buffer of RWM53. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

In the above payout process, when payout is performed by adding one stored sheet, the waiting time of about 100 ms is set by the process of steps S361 and S362. As a result, it is possible to show the player that the stored number display LED 76 counts up. For example, when the display of the storage number display LED76 before the storage addition is "08" and nine medals are stored and added to this, "display" 08 "-> 100 ms weight processing->display" 09 "-> 100 ms. Wait processing → ... → 100ms weight processing → display “17”. On the other hand, if no waiting time is provided when adding one stored sheet, the display instantly changes from "08" to "17".
Then, as in the present embodiment, when the number of stored sheets is added, the payout sound output from the sub-control board 80 side is executed by executing the waiting process for 2 bytes for each addition of the sheets (“Purululu ...”). ) And the count-up of the number of stored sheets can be synchronized.

On the other hand, when the number of stored sheets exceeds the maximum number "50" and the medals are actually paid out in the processing after step S363, the 2-byte time waiting processing of steps S360 and S371 is not provided.
This is because, in order to pay out one actual medal, the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out, and as described above, it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal. As a result, the payout time per medal is about 100 ms. Therefore, when the actual medal is paid out, the 2-byte time waiting process is not provided. Therefore, when actually paying out medals, it is possible to synchronize with the payout sound output from the sub-control board 80 side without providing a 2-byte time waiting process.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S69 of FIG. 34.
In step S381, a process of clearing a flag (also referred to as winning information) of the condition device is performed. This process is a process of clearing other than the special combination condition device, and when it is determined that the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination has stopped at the effective line, the process of clearing the special combination condition device is also executed. In the next step S382, the replay display LED is turned off. This process corresponds to the process of setting the D3 bit of the medal management flag to “0” in FIG. 25. Next, the process proceeds to step S383, and the replay operation flag is cleared. This process is a process of setting the D0 bit of the operating state flag to “0” in FIG. 26. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55). As described above, the main control board 50 performs the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 54 at a cycle of 2.235 ms in parallel with the main process of FIG. 34. In other words, the interrupt processing of FIG. 54 can be executed at a predetermined cycle. In the present embodiment, the interrupt period is set to 2.235 ms, but the period is not limited to this period.
First, when the process shifts to the interrupt process of step S601, in step S602, the register value is saved and the duplicate interrupt is prohibited as the initial process. Here, since the register of the main CPU 55 used in the main processing is used in the interrupt processing, the current register value is saved in the stack area of the RWM 53. Furthermore, the interrupt disable flag is turned on so that the next interrupt processing is not started during the interrupt processing. This is because, for example, an interrupt processing execution request may be made during the execution of the power off processing.

In the next step S603, it is determined whether or not a power failure is detected. Here, when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value by the voltage monitoring device (power supply disconnection detection circuit) provided on the main control board 50 (not shown), the power is supplied to the D0 bit of the input port 2 in FIG. Since a disconnection detection signal is input, it is detected whether or not the signal has been input.
Then, when the power off is detected, the process proceeds to the power off process in step S619, and when it is determined that the power off is not detected, the process proceeds to step S604.

In step S604, the interrupt counter value is updated. This process is a process of subtracting the interrupt counter value by "1" in FIG. 28.
In the next step S605, timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT; FIG. 55) is performed. This process is a process of updating (subtracting, etc.) all the timer values shown in FIG.
Next, the process proceeds to step S606 to control the LED display. This process is a process of lighting a set value, a stored number of sheets, an acquired number of sheets, an error display content (error code), and the like by using a 7-segment LED (digits 1 to 5) according to the state of the slot machine 10.

In step S72 of FIG. 34 and the unrecoverable error shown in step S620 in FIG. 54, an error display is output by the main process, but the set value, the number of stored sheets, and the number of acquired sheets during setting change or setting confirmation are output. The recoverable error is displayed by the LED display control in step S606 for each interrupt process.

Next, the process proceeds to step S607 to read input ports 0 to 2 (FIG. 18). As a result, whether or not the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, etc. have been operated, the switch signal, and the input signals of various sensors are read, and the data (level data, rise) based on the input ports 0 to 2 is read. Data, falling data; FIGS. 21 to 23) are generated and stored at a predetermined address of RWM53. In the next step S608, the built-in random number check process is performed. In the present embodiment, a flag that turns on when an error occurs in the built-in random number is provided, and it is determined whether or not this flag is on.

Specifically, for example, when a clock frequency abnormality of a random number for a winning combination lottery (when the random number update is slow, etc.) is detected, the error flag is turned on. More specifically, it is provided with SCLK (oscillation source: 12 MHz) and RCK (oscillation source: 9 MHZ) input to the MPU, and the built-in random number is updated based on the RCK. At this time, the error flag is turned on when "RCK <SCLK / 2" is satisfied.

Then, the process proceeds to step S609 to determine whether or not an error has occurred in the built-in random number (whether or not the error flag is on), and when it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S610 and an error occurs. When it is determined that the occurrence has occurred, the process proceeds to step S620, and the process proceeds to the non-recoverable error processing. The error display content at this time is "E7".

In step S610, the drive control of the reel 31 is performed. This control is performed in 31 reel units (left, middle, right), and includes stopping, constant speed, acceleration, deceleration, deceleration start, and standby depending on the operating state, respectively. When the drive control of the reel 31 is completed, the process proceeds to step S611 to perform port output processing. This process performs the excitation output of the motor 32 and the hopper motor 36 and the excitation output of the blocker 45.

In the next step S612, a passage sensor check (PATHSEN_CHK; FIG. 56) is performed. This process is a process of detecting whether or not the passage sensor 43a has risen and setting a timer value related to the blocker 45 based on the detection result.
In the next step S613, a control command is transmitted. This process outputs, for example, the control commands set in the output request set and the control command set 1 (untransmitted control commands stored in the control command buffer of the RWM53) from the output ports 5 and 6, for example, the output port 8. This is a process of transmitting the data in which the bit (for example, D4 bit) corresponding to the data strobe signal (not shown) is set to “1” from the output port 8 to the sub-control board 80.

Here, the "data strobe signal" is a signal transmitted to the sub control board 80 together with the sub control data signals 1 to 16. When the sub control board 80 receives the data strobe signal, the sub control board 80 controls to acquire the data of the sub control data signals 1 to 16 from the buffer provided in the sub control board 80 based on the rising edge of the data strobe signal.
When a control command is set in the control command buffer in the output request set and control command set 1, interrupt processing after that point (if the control command buffer is empty, in principle, interrupt processing that comes after that point in time. ), The control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by this step S613. Then, after the output processing from the output ports 5 and 6 is executed, the data probe signal (for example, D4 bit) of the output port 8 is set to "0".

In the next step S614, external signal output data management (IS_INF_CTL; FIG. 57) is performed, and in the next step S615, external signal output (IS_COUNTER_OUT; FIG. 58) is performed. These processes are processes in which the output data of the external signal output from the output port 4 is set (stored in a register) and the signal is transmitted to the external centralized terminal plate 100 shown in FIG.

In the next step S616, the condition device information output (I_CNDINF_OUT; FIG. 59) is performed. This process is a tester for determining whether the slot machine 10 is properly designed in accordance with the law by writing (setting) data to the output port 7 based on the data stored in the RWM 53. On the other hand, it is a process of transmitting a condition device signal as a test signal.
Next, the process proceeds to step S617 to perform random number update processing. In the next step S618, the register value saved in step S602 is restored to allow the next interrupt. Specifically, the register data stored at the start of interrupt processing is restored, and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt processing can be started. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

As shown in the above processing, the on / off of the stored number display LED76, the acquired number display LED78, the status display LED79 (79a to 79g), and the set value display LED73 is controlled by the interrupt processing every 2.235 ms. Since the dynamic lighting is executed for the digits 1 to 5, in the LED display control in step S606, the lighting process is performed for any one digit. Therefore, the lighting timing of the digit arrives once every five interrupts.
Further, for each interrupt process, when a control command that has not been transmitted to the sub-control board 80 is stored in the control command buffer, the transmission process is performed.

Note that interrupt processing is not performed during unrecoverable error processing.
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that cannot normally occur, and processing based on abnormal data (data update of RWM53 based on data from an input port, transmission of a control command to the sub control board 80, etc.) is executed. The interrupt itself is prohibited to prevent it from happening.
In other words, it is meaningless to execute the control command set 1 because the control command is not transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 at the time of the unrecoverable error.
Further, when an unrecoverable error occurs and an untransmitted control command is stored in the control command buffer, the control command is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. This is because the control command stored in the control buffer may be incorrect.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) shown in step S605 in FIG. 54.
In step S631, the measurement start timer address is set. Here, the measurement start timer address refers to the reference address. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, "F021 (H)" is the reference address. Therefore, in step S631, "F021 (H)" is set in the HL register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S632, and the number of 1-byte timers is set in the B register. The number of 1-byte timers indicates the number of 1-byte timers in FIG. 31. As shown in FIG. 31, there are a total of seven 1-byte timers, "F021 (H)" to "F027 (H)". Therefore, here, "7" is set in the B register.

In the next step S633, the 1-byte timer value is updated. In the processing here, the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is subtracted by "1". For example, when "46 (D)" is stored in "F021 (H)", it becomes "45 (D)". Further, when a carry occurs as a result of subtracting "1" (that is, when the value before subtraction is "0"), "0" is stored.

Next, the process proceeds to step S634, and the next timer address is set. This process is a process of adding "1" to the HL register value. In the next step S635, it is determined whether or not the 1-byte timer measurement is completed. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the B register value and determining whether or not the subtracted B register value is "0". If the B register value after subtraction is not "0", it is determined that the 1-byte timer measurement has not been completed.
When it is determined that the 1-byte timer measurement has been completed, the process proceeds to step S636, and when it is determined that the 1-byte timer measurement has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S633.
By repeating the above steps S633 to 635, all seven 1-byte timers are subtracted by "1" (however, as described above, when "0" is stored as the 1-byte timer value, "0" is stored. 0 ”is maintained.).

In step S636, the number of 2-byte timers is set in the B register. This process is a process of setting the number of 2-byte timers in FIG. 31. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, since there are three 2-byte timers, "3" is stored in the B register.
In the next step S637, the 2-byte timer value is updated. In this process, "1" is subtracted from the 2-byte data in which the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is the lower digit and the address value indicated by "HL register value + 1" is the upper digit.
A specific example is as follows.
(1) Example 1
HL register value = F028 (H) (the same applies hereinafter),
F028 (H) = 05 (H)
F029 (H) = 01 (H)
When, when "1" is subtracted,
F028 (H) = 04 (H)
F029 (H) = 01 (H)
Will be.

(2) Example 2
F028 (H) = 00 (H)
F029 (H) = 01 (H)
When, when "1" is subtracted,
F028 (H) = FF (H)
F029 (H) = 00 (H)
Will be.
(3) Example 3
F028 (H) = 50 (H)
F029 (H) = 00 (H)
When, when "1" is subtracted,
F028 (H) = 4F (H)
F029 (H) = 00 (H)
Will be.

(4) Example 4
F028 (H) = 01 (H)
F029 (H) = 00 (H)
When, when "1" is subtracted,
F028 (H) = 00 (H)
F029 (H) = 00 (H)
Will be.
(5) Example 5
F028 (H) = 00 (H) F029 (H) = 00 (H)
When, when "1" is subtracted,
F028 (H) = 00 (H)
F029 (H) = 00 (H)
Will be.

In the next step S638, the next timer address is set. This process executes a process of adding "1" to the HL register value and further adding "1" to the HL register value. As a result, the HL register value is added by "2". In other words, since the address indicated by the HL register value is shifted by two, for example, when "F028 (H)" has been specified until then, "F02A (H)" is specified by the operation.
In the next step S639, it is determined whether or not the 2-byte timer measurement has been completed. This process subtracts the B register value by "1", and when the subtracted B register value is not "0", it is determined that the 2-byte timer measurement has not been completed. When it is determined that the 2-byte timer measurement has not been completed, the process returns to step S637, and when it is determined that the 2-byte timer measurement has been completed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
By repeating the above steps S637 to 639, all three 2-byte timers are subtracted by "1" (however, as described above, when "0" is stored as the 2-byte timer value, "0" is stored. 0 ”is maintained.).

As described above, by arranging the addresses of the 1-byte timers in succession, the timer values stored in the addresses of the 1-byte timers can be sequentially updated only by looping the processes of steps S633 to S635.
Similarly, by arranging the addresses of the 2-byte timers in succession, the timer values stored in the addresses of the 2-byte timers can be sequentially updated only by looping the processes of steps S637 to S639. As a result, the program capacity can be reduced in the timer update process.
Further, the storage area of the 1-byte timer (F021 (H) to F027 (H)) and the storage area of the 2-byte timer (F028 (H) to F02D (H)) are continuous, so that the address is stored in the HL register. The process of performing the operation only needs to be performed once (step S631 in FIG. 55), and thereafter, the HL register value is set to "+1" or "+2" (the process of setting the HL register value to "+1" is repeated twice). Since the address to be updated of the timer value can be specified, the program capacity can be reduced in the timer update process.
Specifically, a program that stores an address in the HL register is an instruction that requires 3 bytes as the storage area of the ROM 54, but a program that "+1" the HL register value is an instruction that requires only 1 byte as the storage area of the ROM 54. A program that sets the HL register value to "+2" is an instruction that requires only 2 bytes as the storage area of the ROM 54. It should be noted that these effects also apply to the second embodiment (modification example) described later.

As described with reference to FIG. 31, for the 1-byte timer, in the case of a predetermined predetermined value, for example, the reel stop reception waiting time of “F022 (H)”, “7 (H)” in step S326 in FIG. ) ”Is set.
On the other hand, regarding the 2-byte timer, for example, in the case of the minimum game time, in step S312 in FIG. 50, "072C (H)" corresponding to "1836 (D)" is set and "072C" is set. In some cases, "082B (H)" is set by adding "FF (H)" to "(H)".
Then, in the former case, when the timer value becomes "0", it is determined in FIG. 50 that the minimum game time has passed in step S311. This point is the same as that of the 1-byte timer.

Here, when "072C (H)" is set as the minimum game time, "2C (H)" is stored in "F02C (H)" (lower digit), and "7 (H)" is stored in "F02D (lower digit)". Store in "H)" (upper digit).
Then, when updating the minimum game time, 2 bytes consisting of "F02C (H)" (lower digit) and "F02D (H)" (upper digit) for each interrupt (every time the timer measurement process is executed). Subtract "1" from the data of.
Further, when determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed, when the 2-byte data is "0" (specifically, the data stored in "F02C (H)" (lower digit) is L. When the data stored in the register and stored in "F02D (H)" (upper digit) is stored in the H register and the HL register value is "0" (zero flag = "1"), the minimum game time is set. Judge that it has passed.

On the other hand, when setting "082B (H)" which is obtained by adding "FF (H)" to "072C (H)" as the minimum game time, "2B (H)" is changed to "F02C (H)" ( It is stored in the lower digit), and "8 (H)" is stored in the "F02D (H)" (upper digit).
Then, when updating the minimum game time, 2 bytes consisting of "F02C (H)" (lower digit) and "F02D (H)" (upper digit) for each interrupt (every time the timer measurement process is executed). Subtract "1" from the data of.
Further, when determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed, the data stored in the high-order digit 1-byte data when the data is "0" (specifically, "F02D (H)" (high-order digit) is ". When it is "0" (zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the minimum game time has passed.

The same applies to the other 2-byte timers.
In FIG. 31, when setting "0A7E (H)" in which "FF (H)" is not added to the medal payout device control time of the addresses "F028 (H)" and "F029 (H)", "7E ( "H)" is stored in "F028 (H)" (lower digit), and "A (H)" is stored in "F029 (H)" (upper digit).
Then, when updating the medal payout device control time, each interrupt (every time the timer measurement process is executed) is composed of "F028 (H)" (lower digit) and "F029 (H)" (upper digit). Subtract "1" from the 2-byte data.
Further, when determining whether or not the medal payout device control time has elapsed, the data stored in the 2-byte data when the data is "0" (specifically, "F028 (H)" (lower digit)). Is stored in the L register, the data stored in "F029 (H)" (upper digit) is stored in the H register, and when the HL register value is "0" (zero flag = "1"), the medal is paid out. It is determined that the device control time has passed.

On the other hand, when setting "0B7D (H)" which is obtained by adding "FF (H)" to "0A7E (H)" as the medal payout device control time, "7D (H)" is changed to "F028 (H)". "(Lower digit), and" B (H) "is stored in" F029 (H) "(upper digit).
Then, when updating the medal payout device control time, each interrupt (every time the timer measurement process is executed) is composed of "F028 (H)" (lower digit) and "F029 (H)" (upper digit). Subtract "1" from the 2-byte data.
Further, when determining whether the medal payout device control time has elapsed, the data stored in the high-order digit 1 byte data is “0” (specifically, “F029 (H)” (high-order digit)). When is "0" (zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the medal payout device control time has elapsed.

Similarly, in FIG. 31, when setting "68DE (H)" without adding "FF (H)" to the game standby display start time of the addresses "F02A (H)" and "F02B (H)", "DE (H)" is stored in "F02A (H)" (lower digit), and "68 (H)" is stored in "F02B (H)" (upper digit).
Then, when updating the game standby display start time, each interrupt (every time the timer measurement process is executed) is composed of "F02A (H)" (lower digit) and "F02B (H)" (upper digit). Subtract "1" from the 2-byte data.
Further, when determining whether or not the game standby display start time has elapsed, the data stored in the 2-byte data when the data is "0" (specifically, "F02A (H)" (lower digit)). Is stored in the L register, the data stored in "F02B (H)" (upper digit) is stored in the H register, and when the HL register value is "0" (zero flag = "1"), the game is on standby. It is judged that the display start time has passed.

On the other hand, when setting "69DD (H)" which is obtained by adding "FF (H)" to "68DE (H)" as the game standby display start time, "DD (H)" is changed to "F02A (H)". "(Lower digit), and" 69 (H) "is stored in" F02B (H) "(upper digit).
Then, when updating the game standby display start time, each interrupt (every time the timer measurement process is executed) is composed of "F02A (H)" (lower digit) and "F02B (H)" (upper digit). Subtract "1" from the 2-byte data.
Further, when determining whether the game standby display start time has elapsed, the data stored in the high-order digit 1 byte data is “0” (specifically, “F02B (H)” (high-order digit)). When is "0" (zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the game standby display start time has passed.

As described above, when "FF (H)" is added, it can be determined that the timer value has become "0" simply by determining whether or not the high-order byte (high-order digit) has become "0". Will be described below. In the following description, a decimal number will be given as an example for ease of understanding.
For example, when the timer value is "1956" and the above "FF (H)" is not added, this "1956" is stored in the RWM53. Here, since the lower digit is "56" and the upper digit is "19", they are stored in the storage area of the RWM.
Then, when determining whether or not "1956" has elapsed, it is necessary to determine whether or not both the upper digit storage area and the lower digit storage area of the RWM storage area have become "0". There is.

On the other hand, when the timer value is "1956" and the above method of adding "FF (H)" is used, "2055" obtained by adding "99" to this "1956" is stored in the RWM53. ..
In this case, "55" is stored as the lower digit and "20" is stored as the upper digit.
With this setting, when determining whether or not "1956" has passed, it is possible to determine whether or not "1956" has passed by simply determining whether or not the high-order digit has become "0".
Specifically, after memorizing "2055", subtracting "1" at a time,
2055 → 2054 → ・ ・ ・ → 0101 → 0100 → 0099 → ・ ・ ・ → 0000
Will be. Then, when the timer value becomes "00099", it can be determined that "1856" has passed.

As described above, when considering in decimal numbers, the maximum value of the lower digits "99" is added, but in hexadecimal numbers, the maximum value "FF (H)" that can be stored in the 1-byte storage area is added. to add.
Then, when the timer value becomes "00FF (H)" (the upper digit is "0"), it can be determined that the timer value before adding "FF (H)" has become "0". ..

The above will be described by taking, for example, the minimum game time (1837 interrupts) as an example.
072C (H) → 072B (H) → ・ ・ ・ → 0700 (H) → 06FF (H) → ・ ・ ・ → 0100 (H) → 00FF (H) → ・ ・ ・ → 0001 (H) → 0000 (H) )
Will be.
Here, the number of interrupts from "072C (H)" to "0000 (H)" is "1837".
On the other hand, in "082B (H)", which is "072C (H)" plus "FF (H)",
082B (H) → 082A (H) → ・ ・ ・ → 0800 (H) → 07FF (H) → ・ ・ ・ → 0100 (H) → 00FF (H) → ・ ・ ・ → 0000 (H)
Will be.
Here, the number of interrupts from "082B (H)" to "00FF (H)" is "1837". That is, when the upper digit changes from "08 (H)" to "00 (H)", the minimum game time elapses.
In this way, "1" is subtracted from the lower digit for each interrupt, but the minimum game time can be determined simply by determining whether or not the upper digit has become "0" regardless of the value of the lower digit. It is possible to judge whether or not it has passed.

In addition, when the timer value to which "FF (H)" is added is set and the timer value becomes "00FF (H)", it is judged that the predetermined time has passed, but it is still lower. The byte timer value is decremented by "1" for each interrupt. Therefore, if the timer value is not reset, the timer value will eventually become "0000 (H)". Further, even after the value becomes "0000 (H)", "1" is subtracted (updated) for each interrupt, and "0000 (H)" is maintained.
Here, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (when it becomes "00FF (H)"), it is conceivable to execute the process of setting the lower byte to "0".
However, regardless of the timer value, if the process of subtracting "1" for each interrupt is continued, it is not necessary to perform the process of determining whether or not the predetermined time has elapsed, so that the process is simplified (program capacity). Can be reduced).

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the passage sensor check (PAHTSEN_CHK) in step S612 in FIG. 54.
First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the passage sensor rises. In FIG. 22, this process determines that the passage sensor has risen when the D0 bit of the input port 1 rising data is “1”. When it is determined that the passage sensor has risen, the process proceeds to step S702, and when it is determined that there is no rise, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S702, the monitoring time when the blocker is off is set. This process is a process of setting the timer value “144 (D)” to the address “F026 (H)” in FIG. 31.
Next, the process proceeds to step S703, and the monitoring time when the blocker is turned on is set. This process is a process of setting the timer value “45 (D)” to the address “F027 (H)” in FIG. 31. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

Here, when the blocker-off monitoring time and the blocker-on monitoring time are set, "1" is subtracted from the next interrupt process in step S605 in FIG. 54, respectively.
Whether or not the blocker-on monitoring time has elapsed is determined in step S132, for example, in FIG. 41.
Further, it is determined in step S211 in FIG. 45, for example, whether or not the monitoring time at the time of blocker off has elapsed.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the external signal output data management (IS_INF_CTL) in step S614 of FIG. 54.
First, in step S731, the external signal output flag is acquired in FIG. 30. The value acquired here is stored in the B register. The bits acquired here are D2 to D4 bits (external signals 1 to 3) out of 8 bits. These D2 to D4 bits (external signals 1 to 3) correspond to the output port 4 (FIG. 20).
Further, in this process, the B register is used as a register for storing external signal output data.

Next, the process proceeds to step S732 to determine whether or not the door switch signal is on. In the process here, the address "F00A (H)" of the input port 1-level data is stored in the HL register in FIG. 22. Next, the data of the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register. Then, the A register value and "00000010" are ANDed, and when the calculation result is not "0" (when the zero flag ≠ "1"), it is determined as "Yes".
When it is determined that the door switch signal is on, the process proceeds to step S733, and when it is determined that the door switch signal is not on, the process proceeds to step S734.
In step S733, the external signal 5 output data is set. This process adds "1" to the B register value. Here, the D0 bit of the B register value up to that point is "0", but this process sets the D0 bit of the B register to "1". Then, the process proceeds to step S734. This D0 bit corresponds to the D0 bit of the output port 4 in FIG. The method is not limited to the method of adding "1" to the B register value, and any operation may be performed in which the D0 bit of the B register becomes "1".

In step S734, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch signal is on. This process determines whether or not the D3 bit is "1" in the data (input port 1 level data; FIG. 22) at the address "F00A (H)" indicated by the HL register value. When it is determined that the setting key switch signal is on, the process proceeds to step S737, and when it is determined that the setting key switch signal is not on, the process proceeds to step S735.
In the next step S735, the data of the abnormal input flag is stored in the A register in FIG. 24. Although not shown in FIG. 54, the abnormal input flag is generated during interrupt processing. Further, in FIG. 31, the value of the external signal 4 output time at the time of power failure / recovery at the address “F025 (H)” and the A register value are OR-calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the A register.

Then, in the next step S736, it is determined whether or not the A register value (the value calculated in step S735) is "0". When the A register value is "0" (zero flag = "1"), it is determined that there is no data, and the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined as "No" in step S736, the process proceeds to step S737, and the D1 bit of the B register is set to "1". In other words, the D1 bit of the B register is set to "1" when a recoverable error has occurred or the output time of the external signal 4 has not elapsed at the time of power failure recovery. This D1 bit corresponds to the D1 bit of the output port 4 in FIG. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
By the above external signal output data management, the D0 to D4 bits of the B register are set to predetermined values.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the external signal output (I_COUNTER_OUT) in step S615 of FIG. 54.
First, in step S741, the following processing is executed.
(1) In FIG. 30, the address (F094 (H)) of the RWM53 storing the medal signal data is stored in the DE register.
(2) In FIG. 31, the address “F021 (H)” external signal output time value is stored in the A register. (3) When the A register value is "0" (when the zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the external signal output time has ended. When it is determined that the external signal output time has ended, the process proceeds to step S742, and when it is determined that the external signal output time has not ended, the process proceeds to step S step S751.

In step S742, the timer value “46 (D)” is set in the external signal output time in FIG. 31. By the above processing, when the external signal output time is "0", "46 (D)" is set, and when it is not "0", the set is not performed.
In the next step S743, the following processing is executed.
(1) In FIG. 27, the address (F070 (H)) of the RWM53 that stores the number of times the medal bet signal is output is stored in the HL register.
(2) The value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
(3) When the A register value is "0", it is determined that there is no medal bet signal output count. If it is determined in step S743 that there is a medal bet signal output count, the process proceeds to step S744, and if it is determined that there is no medal bet signal output count, the process proceeds to step S746.

In the next step S744, "1" is subtracted from the value (the number of times the medal bet signal is output) stored in the address (F070 (H)) indicated by the HL register value.
In the next step S745, the D6 bit of the C register is set to "1". The D6 bit corresponds to the D6 bit (medal bet signal) of the output port 4 in FIG.

In the next step S746, the following processing is executed.
(1) Set the address value indicated by the HL register value to "+1". As a result, as shown in FIG. 27, the HL register value changes from the address “F070 (H)” indicating the number of times the medal bet signal is output to the address “F071 (H)” indicating the number of times the medal payout signal is output.
(2) The value (the number of times the medal payout signal is output) stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
(3) When the A register value is not "0", it is determined that the medal payout signal has been output a number of times. If it is determined in step S746 that the medal payout signal has been output, the process proceeds to step S747, and if it is determined that the medal payout signal has not been output, the process proceeds to step S749.

In step S747, "1" is subtracted from the number of medal payout outputs. Specifically, the value stored in the address (F071 (H)) indicated by the HL register value is subtracted by "1".
In the next step S748, the D7 bit of the C register is set to "1". Note that this D7 bit corresponds to the D7 bit (medal payout signal) of the output port 4 in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to step S749.

In step S749, the output bit is inverted on / off. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The value (medal signal data) stored in the address (F094 (H)) indicated by the DE register value is stored in the A register.
(2) The A register value and the C register value are XOR-operated, and the operation result is stored in the A register.
(3) The A register value is stored in the address (F094 (H); medal signal data) indicated by the DE register value.

Here, the C register value is always "1" in the D7 bit when the number of times the medal payout signal is output is not "0". When the number of times the medal bet signal is output is not "0", the D6 bit is always "1".
On the other hand, in the medal signal data (F094 (H)) which is the A register value, the D7 bit is “1” when the medal payout signal is on, and the D7 bit is “0” when the medal payout signal is off. Similarly, in the medal signal data, the D6 bit is "1" when the medal bet signal is on, and the D6 bit is "0" when the medal bet signal is off.

Therefore, for example, when the medal payout signal is "1" and the medal payout signal output count is not "0",
A register value: 10000000
C register value: 10000000
After XOR operation: 00000000000 (A register value after update)
Then, the updated medal payout signal becomes "0".
When the medal payout signal is "0" and the medal payout signal output count is not "0",
A register value: 00000000
C register value: 10000000
After XOR operation: 10000000 (A register value after update)
The updated medal payout signal will be "1".

The same applies to the medal bet signal. For example, when the medal payout signal is "0", the medal bet signal is "1", the medal payout signal output count is not "0", and the medal bet signal output count is not "0",
A register value: 01000000
C register value: 11000000
After XOR operation: 10000000 (A register value after update)
The updated medal payout signal is "1" and the medal bet signal is "0".
Similarly, for example, when the medal payout signal is "1", the medal bet signal is "0", the medal payout signal output count is not "0", and the medal bet signal output count is not "0",
A register value: 100000000
C register value: 11000000
After XOR operation: 01000000 (A register value after update)
The updated medal payout signal is "0" and the medal bet signal is "1".

Next, the process proceeds to step S750, and the output data of the medal bet signal and the medal payout signal are set. This process is a process of storing the value stored in the address (F094 (H); medal signal data) indicated by the DE register value in the A register.
By this process, when the medal payout signal is on, the D7 bit of the A register becomes “1”, and when the medal bet signal is on, the D6 bit of the A register becomes “1”.

Next, the process proceeds to step S751, the B register value and the A register value are ORed, and the calculation result is stored in the A register. Here, the B register value is a value stored by the external signal output data management of FIG. 57, and D0 to D4 bits (external signals 1 to 5) are defined.
Further, the medal bet signal and the medal payout signal data are stored in the A register according to this flowchart. Therefore, by performing an OR operation on the B register value and the A register value, the data of the external signals 1 to 5 and the medal bet signal and the medal payout signal data are combined in the A register (1 byte). Further, the A register value is stored in the output port 4 in FIG. As a result, an external signal is transmitted from the output port 4. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the condition device information output (I_CNDINF_OUT) in step S616 of FIG. 54.
In step S761, the clear data of the condition device information is set. This process is a process of storing the value stored in the condition device output time of the address “F024 (H)” in the A register in FIG. 31.
As described above, in FIG. 50, when it is determined that the minimum game time (about 4.1 seconds) has elapsed in step S311, the value of “25 (D)” is set in the condition device output time in step S316. Be remembered. Then, this value is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt (specifically, when the timer is measured in step S605 of FIG. 54). Therefore, after the value of "25 (D)" is stored, it becomes "0" after the interruption of "25".

In the next step S762, it is determined whether or not it is time to output the condition device information. This process determines whether or not the value stored in the A register is "0" (zero flag = "1"), and if it is "0", it is determined that the condition device information is not output, and "0". If not, it is determined that the condition device information is being output. When it is determined that the condition device information is being output, the process proceeds to step S763, and when it is determined that the condition device information is not being output, the process proceeds to step S767.

In step S763, the address of RWM53 of the accessory condition device information is set. Specifically, in FIG. 29, the address "F092 (H)" of the accessory condition device information is stored in the HL register. As a result, the H register value = "F0 (H)" and the L register value = "92 (H)". In the next step S764, it is determined whether or not it is time to output the accessory condition device information. This process performs an operation of subtracting "12.5 (25/2)" from the value stored in the A register (the condition device output time is stored in the A register in step S761). When it is determined that the calculation result is larger than "0" (carry flag ≠ "1"), it is determined to be "Yes". That is, it is determined whether or not half the time has passed from the initial value "24" of the condition device output time. If it is determined that it is time to output the accessory condition device information, the process proceeds to step S766, and if it is determined that it is not the time to output the accessory condition device information, the process proceeds to step S765.

In step S765, the address of the RWM53 of the winning and replay condition device information is set. In this process, "1" is subtracted from the HL register value in order to store the address of the winning and replay condition device information in FIG. 29, that is, "F091 (H)" in the HL register. As a result, the HL register value = "F091 (H)" (H register value = "F0 (H)" and the L register value = "91 (H)").

Next, the process proceeds to step S766 to acquire the condition device information. This process is a process of storing the data (character condition device information or winning and replay condition device information) stored in the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register. Therefore, when the HL register value = "F091 (H)", the value of the winning and replay condition device information is stored, and when the HL register value = "F092 (H)", the accessory condition device information is stored. The value is stored.
Next, the process proceeds to step S767, and the information stored in the A register is output to the output port 7 in FIG. As a result, the condition device information can be output (transmitted) from the output port 7 to the testing machine (in the slot machine 10 on the market, although the output process is executed, it is not actually output). Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

In the above condition device information output process, in step S762, when the timer value of the condition device output time is "0", it is determined as "No", and the process proceeds to step S767. In this case, since the A register value is "0", "0" (0000000000 (B)) is output as the condition device information.

When the value of the condition device output time is not "0" (when it is "1" to "24"), the condition device information is output for each interrupt process.
As the initial value of the conditional device output time, "25 (D)" is set in step S316 of FIG. 50, but "1" is subtracted in step S605 during the interrupt processing of FIG. 54, and then step S616. Proceed to the condition device information output processing of. Therefore, in FIG. 50, when “25” is set in step S316 and then the first step S762 in FIG. 59 is performed, the condition device output time value is “24”.

Further, when the condition device information is output, if the condition device output time is "13" to "24" (first period) at the judgment of step S764, step S765 is not executed. The device information becomes the accessory condition device information. On the other hand, if the condition device output time is "1" to "12" (second period) in the judgment of step S764, the process of step S765 is executed, so that the condition device information to be output wins a prize. And replay information device information.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an output example of condition device information in step S767 of FIG. 59.
In the example of FIG. 60, in the 1BBA game, the winning and replay condition device number "23" (small winning combination C1) is won in the "N" game, and in the next "N + 1" game, the winning and replay condition device. An output example of the condition device information when the number "1" (replay A) is won is shown. In addition, 1 BBA shall not be won in the "N" game.
First, when the inside of 1BBA is inside, the D0 bit of the accessory condition device information is "1". Therefore, the accessory condition device information is "10000001 (B)".
Further, when the condition device number "23" is won in the "N" game, the D0 to D5 bits of the prize and replay condition device information are "010111" (= "23 (D)"), so that the prize is won. And the replay condition device information is "01010111 (B)".

Then, in the "N" game, while the condition device output time value is "24 (D)" to "13 (D)", it becomes "Yes" in step S764 of FIG. 59, and the winning combination set in step S763. Physical condition device information is output. Next, while the condition device output time value is "12 (D)" to "1 (D)", the result is "No" in step S764 of FIG. 59, and the winning and replay condition device information set in step S765 is displayed. Output. Next, when the condition device output time value becomes “0”, it becomes “No” in step S762 of FIG. 59, so that the condition device information (“00000000000 (B)”) cleared in step S761 is output.

Next, when a lottery for the winning combination is performed in the "N + 1" game and the winning and replay condition device number "1" is won, the condition device output time values are "24 (D)" to "13 (D)". While, "10000001 (B)" is output as in the "N" game, and while the condition device output time value is "12 (D)" to "1 (D)", "0100001" is output. (B) ”is output. As a result, the signal waveform shown in FIG. 60 is obtained.

<Second Embodiment>
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing address arrangement of timer values of the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 31 of the first embodiment.
The second embodiment of FIG. 61 illustrates three types A to C.
In the second embodiment A, the arrangement of the addresses and the contents of each address are the same as those in the first embodiment (FIG. 31). However, the reference address is different from that of the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the reference address is set to "F021 (H)", but in the second embodiment A, the reference address is "F02C (H)".

In the first embodiment, as shown in the timer measurement flowchart of FIG. 55, the timer value of the reference address “F021 (H)” (first) is started and finally the timer value of “F02C (H)” is set to “1”. Subtracted.
On the other hand, in the second embodiment A, the timer value of "F021 (H)" is subtracted by "1" at the end, starting from the reference address "F02C (H)" (first).

Further, in FIG. 61, in the second embodiment B, addresses are assigned in order from the 2-byte timer. Therefore, the addresses "F028 (H)" to "F02D (H)" in the first embodiment are the addresses "F021 (H)" to "F026 (H)" in the second embodiment B.
For example, the addresses "F021 (H)" and "F022 (H)" are addresses for the medal payout device control time. Further, this address becomes a reference address. The address of the 1-byte timer is arranged after the 2-byte timer and ranges from "F027 (H)" to "F02D (H)".
Furthermore, in FIG. 61, in the second embodiment C, the arrangement and contents of the addresses are the same as those in the second embodiment B, but the reference address is "F02D (H)". Different from embodiment B.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a timer measurement (Example 1) based on the address arrangement and the reference address of the second embodiment A in FIG. 61.
First, in step S771, the measurement start timer address is set. This process is a process of storing "F02E (H)" in the HL register. As shown in FIG. 61, the address range of the timer value is "F021 (H)" to "F02D (H)". Therefore, "F02E (H)" is not the address range of the timer value. However, in step S771, the value obtained by adding "2" to "F02C (H)", which is the lower digit address of the reference address, is stored in the HL register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S772, and the number of 2-byte timers is set. Since the number of 2-byte timers is "3" as in the first embodiment, "3" is stored in the B register.

In the next step S773, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the value stored in the HL register and further subtracting "1" from the value stored in the HL register. In other words, it is a process of subtracting "2" from the value stored in the HL register.
By this process, "F02E (H)" is initially stored in the HL register, but in step S773, "F02C (H)" (the address of the minimum game time) is stored in the HL register.
If "F02C (H)" is stored in the HL register before the processing of step S773, "F02A (H)" (address of the game standby display start time) is stored in the HL register by the processing of step S773. Is memorized.
Furthermore, when "F02A (H)" is stored in the HL register before the processing of step S773, "F028 (H)" (address of the medal payout device control time) is stored in the HL register by the processing of step S773. Is memorized.

In the next step S774, the 2-byte timer value is updated. In this process, "1" is subtracted from the 2-byte value consisting of the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value and the value stored in the address obtained by adding "1" to the address indicated by the HL register value. Execute the process to be performed. This process is the same as step S637 in FIG. In the second embodiment, the "2-byte timer value update" is the same as this process.
Next, the process proceeds to step S775, and it is determined whether or not the measurement of the 2-byte timer is completed. Here, the B register value is subtracted by "1", and when the B register value after the subtraction is "0", it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer is completed.
When it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer has been completed, the process proceeds to step S776, and when it is determined that the measurement has not been completed, the process returns to step S773.

In step S776, the number of 1-byte timers is set. In this process, "7", which is a 1-byte timer and corresponds to the number of timer values to be updated, is stored in the B register.
In the next step S777, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the HL register value.
Here, when the process proceeds from step S775 to step S776, the HL register value is "F028 (H)". Therefore, by subtracting the HL register value by "1", the HL register value becomes "F027 (H)", and the address of the monitoring time at the time of blocker on is stored.

Next, the process proceeds to step S778 to update the 1-byte timer value. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value. This process is the same as step S633 in FIG. 55. In the second embodiment, "1 byte timer value update" is the same as this process.
Then, in the next step S779, it is determined whether or not the measurement of the 1-byte timer is completed. Here, the B register value is subtracted by "1", and when the B register value after the subtraction is "0", it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer is completed.
When it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer is completed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the measurement has not been completed, the process returns to step S777.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a timer measurement (Example 2) based on the address arrangement and the reference address of the second embodiment A.
First, in step S791, the measurement start timer address is set. This process is a process of storing "F02C (H)" in the HL register.
In this process, unlike Example 1 of the second embodiment A, the reference address (lower digit address) value of the 2-byte timer is stored in the HL register.
In the next step S792, the number of 2-byte timers is set. This process is a process of storing "3" in the B register.
In the next step S793, the 2-byte timer value is updated. This process subtracts "1" from the 2-byte value consisting of the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value and the value stored in the address obtained by adding "1" to the address indicated by the HL register value. It is a process. In other words, it is a process of subtracting "2" from the value stored in the HL register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S794, and the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the value stored in the HL register and further subtracting "1" from the value stored in the HL register.
By this process, "F02C (H)" is initially stored in the HL register, but in step S794, "F02A (H)" (address of the game standby display start time) is stored in the HL register. ..
Further, when "F02A (H)" is stored in the HL register before the processing of step S794, "F028 (H)" (address of the medal payout device control time) is stored in the HL register by the processing of step S794. Is memorized.
Furthermore, when "F028 (H)" is stored in the HL register before the processing of step S794, "F026 (H)" (address of the monitoring time when the blocker is off) is stored in the HL register by the processing of step S794. Is memorized.

In the next step S795, it is determined whether or not the measurement of the 2-byte timer is completed. Here, the B register value is subtracted by "1", and when the B register value after the subtraction is "0", it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer is completed.
When it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer is completed, the process proceeds to step S796. On the other hand, when it is determined that the measurement has not been completed, the process returns to step S793. Proceeding to step S796, address correction is executed. This process is a process of adding "1" to the HL register value.
Here, when the process proceeds from step S795 to step S796, the HL register value is "F026 (H)" as described above. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 61, the address at which the 1-byte timer value is first subtracted is the blocker-on monitoring time of the address “F027 (H)”. Therefore, "1" is added to the HL register value so that it becomes the address to be subtracted at the beginning of the 1-byte timer value.

In the next step S797, the number of 1-byte timers is set. This process is a process of storing "7" in the B register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S798 to update the 1-byte timer value. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value.
In the next step S799, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value.
Then, the process proceeds to step S800, and it is determined whether or not the measurement of the 1-byte timer is completed. Here, the B register value is subtracted by "1", and when the B register value after the subtraction is "0", it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer is completed.
When it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer is completed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the measurement has not been completed, the process returns to step S798.

Comparing Example 1 (FIG. 62) and Example 2 (FIG. 63) of the second embodiment A, in Example 1 (FIG. 62), the process of step S796 (address correction) of Example 2 (FIG. 63) is performed. Since it is not required, the program capacity can be reduced accordingly. In other words, from the viewpoint of reducing the program capacity, the method of storing (setting) an address other than the original timer value address in step S771 is preferable as in Example 1 (FIG. 62).

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the address arrangement of the second embodiment B and the timer measurement at the reference address in FIG. 61.
First, in step S811, the measurement start timer address is set. This process is a process of storing the reference address value “F021 (H)” (address of the medal payout device control time) in the HL register.
In the next step S812, the number of 2-byte timers is set. This process is a process of storing "3" corresponding to the number of 2-byte timers in the B register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S813 to update the 2-byte timer value. This process subtracts "1" from the 2-byte value consisting of the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value and the data stored in the address obtained by adding "1" to the address indicated by the HL register value. It is a process.

Then, the process proceeds to step S814, and the next timer address is set. This process is a process of adding "1" to the value stored in the HL register and further adding "1" to the value stored in the HL register. In other words, it is a process of adding "2" to the value stored in the HL register.
By this process, "F021 (H)" is initially stored in the HL register, but by the process of step S814, "F023 (H)" (address of the game standby display start time) is stored in the HL register. Be remembered.
If "F023 (H)" is stored in the HL register before the processing of step S814, "F025 (H)" (address of the minimum game time) is stored in the HL register by the processing of step S814. Will be done.
Furthermore, when "F025 (H)" is stored in the HL register before the processing of step S814, "F027 (H)" (address of the external signal output time) is stored in the HL register by the processing of step S814. Is memorized.

In the next step S815, it is determined whether or not the measurement of the 2-byte timer is completed. Here, the B register value is subtracted by "1", and when the B register value after the subtraction is "0", it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer is completed.
When it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer has been completed, the process proceeds to step S816, and when it is determined that the measurement has not been completed, the process returns to step S813.

In step S816, the number of 1-byte timers is set. In this process, "7", which is a 1-byte timer and corresponds to the number of timer values to be updated, is stored in the B register.
In the next step S817, the 1-byte timer value is updated. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value. Here, when the process proceeds from step S815 to step S816, the HL register value is "F027 (H)" (address of the external signal output time), and the tie value to be updated first among the 1-byte timers. It is the address of.
Then, in the next step S818, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of adding "1" to the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value.

Next, the process proceeds to step S819, and it is determined whether or not the measurement of the 1-byte timer is completed. Here, the B register value is subtracted by "1", and when the B register value after the subtraction is "0", it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer is completed.
When it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer is completed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the measurement has not been completed, the process returns to step S817.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the address arrangement of the second embodiment C and the timer measurement (example 1) at the reference address in FIG. 61.
First, in step S831, the measurement start timer address is set. Here, the measurement start timer address stores "F02E (H)" in the HL register as in Example 1 of the second embodiment A. This address is the address of the monitoring time at the time of blocker on, which stores the last timer of the 1-byte timer, plus "1".

Next, the process proceeds to step S832, and the number of 1-byte timers is set. Here, "7" is set in the B register.

In the next step S833, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the HL register value. By this processing, for example, when "F02E (H)" is stored in the HL register, "F02D (H)" (address of the monitoring time at the time of blocker on) is stored in the HL register.
If "F02D (H)" is stored in the HL register before the processing of step S833, "F02C (H)" (address of the monitoring time when the blocker is off) is stored in the HL register by the processing of step S833. Be remembered.

Furthermore, when "F028 (H)" is stored in the HL register before the processing of step S833, "F027 (H)" (address of the external signal output time) is stored in the HL register by the processing of step S833. Is memorized.
Next, the process proceeds to step S834 to update the 1-byte timer value. In the processing here, the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is subtracted by "1".

Next, the process proceeds to step S835, and it is determined whether or not the 1-byte timer measurement is completed. This process subtracts "1" from the B register value. Then, when the B register value after subtraction is not "0", it is determined that the 1-byte timer measurement has not been completed.
When it is determined that the 1-byte timer measurement has been completed, the process proceeds to step S836, and when it is determined that the 1-byte timer measurement has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S833.

In step S836, the number of 2-byte timers is set. This process is a process of storing the number "3" of 2-byte timers in the B register.
In the next step S837, the next timer address is set. This process executes a process of subtracting the HL register value by "1" and further subtracting the HL register value by "1". In other words, it is a process of subtracting "2" from the value stored in the HL register.
As a result, since the HL register value at the time of proceeding to step S837 is "F027 (H)", the HL register value becomes "F025 (H)" by the processing of step S837.
Next, the process proceeds to step S838 to update the 2-byte timer value. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from a 2-byte value in which the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is the lower digit and the address value indicated by "HL register value + 1" is the upper digit.

In the next step S839, it is determined whether or not the 2-byte timer measurement has been completed. This process subtracts "1" from the B register, and if the subtracted B register value is not "0", it is determined that the 2-byte timer measurement has not been completed. When it is determined that the 2-byte timer measurement has not been completed, the process returns to step S837, and when it is determined that the 2-byte timer measurement has been completed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the address arrangement of the second embodiment C and the timer measurement (example 2) at the time of the reference address in FIG. 61.
First, in step S851, the measurement start timer address is set. This process is a process of storing the reference address "F02D (H)" in the HL register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S852, and the number of 1-byte timers is set. This process is a process of storing "7", which is the number of 1-byte timers, in the B register.

In the next step S853, the 1-byte timer value is updated. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value.
Then, the process proceeds to step S854, and the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the HL register value. By this process, when "F02D (H)" is stored in the HL register, "F02C (H)" (address of the monitoring time when the blocker is off) is stored in the HL register.
Further, when "F027 (H)" is stored in the HL register before the processing of step S854, "F026 (H)" (upper address of the minimum game time) is stored in the HL register by the processing of step S854. Be remembered.

Next, the process proceeds to step S855, and it is determined whether or not the measurement of the 1-byte timer is completed. Here, the B register value is subtracted by "1", and when the B register value after the subtraction is "0", it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer is completed.
When it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer has been completed, the process proceeds to step S856, and when it is determined that the measurement has not been completed, the process returns to step S853.

In step S856, address correction is performed. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the HL register value. Here, when the process proceeds from step S855 to step S856, the HL register value is "F026 (H)". This address value is not "F025 (H)" which is the first address (lower digit) for starting the subtraction of the 1-byte timer value. Therefore, "1" is subtracted from the HL register value, and the HL register value is corrected so that it becomes the first address (lower digit) at which the subtraction of the 1-byte timer value is started.
Next, the process proceeds to step S857, and the number of 2-byte timers is set. This process is a process of storing "3", which is the number of 2-byte timers, in the B register.
In the next step S858, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the HL register value and further subtracting "1" from the HL register value.

Next, the process proceeds to step S859 to update the 2-byte timer value. In this process, "1" is subtracted from the 2-byte value consisting of the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value and the data stored in the address obtained by adding "1" to the address indicated by the HL register value. It is a process to do.
Next, the process proceeds to step S860, and it is determined whether or not the measurement of the 2-byte timer is completed. Here, "1" is subtracted from the B register value, and when the subtracted B register value is "0", it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer has been completed.
Then, when it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer is completed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that the measurement is not completed, the process returns to step S858.

Comparing Example 1 (FIG. 65) and Example 2 (FIG. 66) of the second embodiment C, in Example 1 (FIG. 65), the process of step S856 (address correction) of Example 2 (FIG. 66) is performed. Since it is not required, the program capacity can be reduced accordingly. In other words, from the viewpoint of reducing the program capacity, the method of storing (setting) an address other than the original timer value address in step S831 is preferable as in Example 1 (FIG. 65).

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) The type of timer of the present embodiment is not limited to that shown in FIG. 31, and various other timers are provided in the game machine. The timer shown in FIG. 31 is an example and does not mean that the timer is limited thereto.
For example, in FIG. 43, when the maintenance medal check in step S182 is performed, the control is as follows.
When the rising signal of the closing sensor 1 is detected, a timer value called the closing sensor 1 passage check time is set, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt process. Then, if the insertion sensor 1 continues to detect medals even when the timer value of the insertion sensor 1 passage check time becomes "0", a medal retention error (CE error) is determined.
Similarly, when the rising signal of the closing sensor 2 is detected, a timer value called the closing sensor 2 passage check time is set, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt process. Then, if the insertion sensor 2 continues to detect medals even when the timer value of the insertion sensor 2 passage check time becomes "0", a medal retention error (CE error) is determined.

Further, in the example of FIG. 31, the number of 1-byte timers is 7 and the number of 2-byte timers is 3. However, regardless of the number of 1-byte timers and 2-byte timers, the rule described with reference to FIG. 31 The addresses may be arranged according to the above.
Here, when the number of 1-byte timers is "N1" and the number of 2-byte timers is "N2", it may be any of "N1>N2","N1 = N2", and "N1 <N2". ..
Further, when "N1 ≥ 2", "N2 = 0" may be used. Similarly, when "N2 ≥ 2", "N1 = 0" may be used.
Furthermore, "N1 ≧ 1 and N2 ≧ 1" may be used.

(2) In the present embodiment, the timer value is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt, but the timer value is not limited to this, and the timer value can be updated at another predetermined cycle. Further, the timer value may be subtracted by "1" by a plurality of interrupts. For example, the timer measurement process may be executed once every five interrupts. Furthermore, the subtraction value of the timer value is not limited to "1". Further, for example, the timer measurement process may be executed once every five interrupts, and the timer value may be subtracted by "2".
(3) In the present embodiment, when the timer value before the update is "0", the timer value is also set to "0" even after the update. However, not limited to this, it is determined whether or not the timer value is "0" before the update, and when it is determined that the timer value before the update is "0", the timer value is transferred from the update processing target. It is also possible to exclude the program. However, as in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the timer value before the update is "0" (without determining whether or not it is "0"), if the program is updated uniformly, the program can be updated. It can be simplified (reduces program capacity).
(4) Each timer value shown in FIG. 31 is an example, and is not limited to the value shown in FIG. 31. For example, the 1-byte timer value shown in FIG. 31 may be a 2-byte timer value depending on the specifications of the slot machine 10, and the 2-byte timer value shown in FIG. 31 may be 1 byte depending on the specifications of the slot machine 10. It may be a timer value.

(5) In the present embodiment, examples of a 1-byte timer and a 2-byte timer are given, but a 3-byte timer can also be provided. When the initial value of the 2-byte timer is set to "FFFF (H)" and "1" is subtracted by interrupt processing every "2.235 ms", about 146 seconds can be counted. Therefore, for example, when counting 3 minutes, a 3-byte timer is required. When the 3-byte timer is provided, the process of adding "3" to the HL register value may be executed when setting the next address of the 3-byte timer.

(6) In the present embodiment, the interrupt processing cycle is set to "2.235 ms", but the period is not limited to this value, and various settings such as 1 ms and 3.5 ms can be set.
Further, the timing for setting the various timer values shown in FIG. 31 is not limited to the one illustrated in the above embodiment, and may be any timing as long as it is an appropriate timing.
(7) The address of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 21 to 31 and the content corresponding to the address are examples, and can be set as appropriate.

<Additional notes>
Examples of the inventions (initial inventions) described in the initial specification of the present application include the following initial inventions 1 to 8, respectively, which solve the problems to be solved by the initial inventions and the problems related to the initial inventions, respectively. The means for this and the effects of the original invention are as follows. However, the invention described in the present specification does not mean that the invention is limited to the initial inventions 1 to 8.

1. 1. Initial invention 1
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 1 In a conventional gaming machine, for example, when there are a plurality of measurement targets (when updating a plurality of timer values), the program may become complicated and the program capacity may increase. is there.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to make it possible to update each count value with a simple program when there are a plurality of count values for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 1 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
(B1) The first solution corresponding to the first embodiment (FIG. 55) is
A plurality of types of 1-byte storage areas for storing 1-byte count values for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (7 of "F021 (H)" to "F027 (H)" in FIG. 31). ) And a count value updating means (timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) in FIG. 55) capable of updating the count value of each storage area in a predetermined cycle (interrupt cycle every 2.235 ms).
The count value updating means is
A process (step S631) of storing a value specifying a predetermined address (F021 (H)) in the first register (HL register) and a predetermined value (“7” which is the number of timers) are stored in the second register (B register). (Step S632) and the process of storing in
a) The process of subtracting "1" from the count value of the storage area based on the value of the first register (step S633).
b) The process of updating the value of the first register (step S634) and
c) The count value of the storage area can be updated by repeatedly executing the process of updating the value of the second register (step S635) until the value of the second register reaches a specific value (“0”). It is characterized by that.

(B2) The first solution corresponding to the second embodiment C (Example 2) (FIG. 66) is
A plurality of types of 1-byte storage areas for storing 1-byte count values for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (in the second embodiment C of FIG. 61, "F027 (H)" to "F02D (" H) ”7) and
It is provided with a count value updating means (timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) in FIG. 66) capable of updating the count value of each storage area in a predetermined cycle (interrupt cycle every 2.235 ms).
The count value updating means is
A process (step S851) of storing a value specifying a predetermined address (F02D (H)) in the first register (HL register) and a predetermined value (“7” which is the number of timers) are stored in the second register (B register). (Step S852) and the process of storing in
a) The process of subtracting "1" from the count value of the storage area based on the value of the first register (step S853).
b) The process of updating the value of the first register (step S854) and
c) The count value of the storage area can be updated by repeatedly executing the process of updating the value of the second register (step S855) until the value of the second register reaches a specific value (“0”). It is characterized by that.

(B3) The second solution (second embodiment C (Example 1) shown in FIG. 65) is
A plurality of types of 1-byte storage areas for storing 1-byte count values for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (in the second embodiment B of FIG. 61, "F027 (H)" to "F02D (" H) ”7) and
It is equipped with a count value updating means (timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) in FIG. 65) capable of updating the count value of each storage area in a predetermined cycle (interrupt cycle every 2.235 ms).
The count value updating means is
A process (step S831) of storing a value specifying a predetermined address (F02E (H)) in the first register (HL register) and a predetermined value (“7” which is the number of timers) are stored in the second register (B register). (Step S832) and the process of storing in
a) The process of updating the value of the first register (step S833) and
b) The process of subtracting "1" from the count value of the storage area based on the value of the first register (step S834).
c) The storage area count value can be updated by repeatedly executing the process of updating the value of the second register (step S835) until the value of the second register reaches a specific value. ..

(B4) The third solution corresponding to the second embodiment A (Example 2) (FIG. 63) is
A plurality of types of 2-byte storage areas for storing 2-byte count values for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (in the second embodiment A of FIG. 61, "F028 (H)" to "F02D (" H) ”3) and
It is equipped with a count value updating means (timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) in FIG. 63) capable of updating the count value of each storage area in a predetermined cycle (interrupt cycle every 2.235 ms).
The count value updating means is
A process (step S791) of storing a value specifying a predetermined address (F02C (H)) in the first register (HL register) and a predetermined value (“3” which is the number of timers) are stored in the second register (B register). (Step S792) and the process of storing in
a) The process of subtracting "1" from the count value of the storage area based on the value of the first register (step S793).
b) The process of updating the value of the first register (step S794) and
c) The storage area count value can be updated by repeatedly executing the process of updating the value of the second register (step S795) until the value of the second register reaches a specific value. ..

(B5) The third solution corresponding to the second embodiment B (FIG. 64) is
A plurality of types of 2-byte storage areas for storing 2-byte count values for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (in the second embodiment B of FIG. 61, "F021 (H)" to "F026 (" H) ”3) and
It is equipped with a count value updating means (timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) in FIG. 64) capable of updating the count value of each storage area in a predetermined cycle (interrupt cycle every 2.235 ms).
The count value updating means is
A process (step S811) of storing a value specifying a predetermined address (F021 (H)) in the first register (HL register) and a predetermined value (“3” which is the number of timers) are stored in the second register (B register). (Step S812) and the process of storing in
a) The process of subtracting "1" from the count value of the storage area based on the value of the first register (step S813).
b) The process of updating the value of the first register (step S814) and
c) The storage area count value can be updated by repeatedly executing the process of updating the value of the second register (step S815) until the value of the second register reaches a specific value. ..

(B6) The fourth solution (second embodiment A (Example 1) shown in FIG. 62) is
A plurality of types of 2-byte storage areas for storing 2-byte count values for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (in the second embodiment A of FIG. 61, "F028 (H)" to "F02D (" H) ”3) and
It is equipped with a count value updating means (timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) in FIG. 62) capable of updating the count value of each storage area in a predetermined cycle (interrupt cycle every 2.235 ms).
The count value updating means is
A process of storing a value for specifying a predetermined address (F02E (H)) in the first register (step S771) and a process of storing a predetermined value (“3” which is the number of timers) in the second register (B register). (Step S772) and
a) The process of updating the value of the first register (step S773) and
b) The process of subtracting "1" from the count value of the storage area based on the value of the first register (step S774).
c) The storage area count value can be updated by repeatedly executing the process of updating the value of the second register (step S775) until the value of the second register reaches a specific value. ..
(C) Effect of Initial Invention 1 According to the original invention, it is possible to continuously update a plurality of types of storage areas only by executing the update processing of the first register and the second register and the subtraction processing of the count value. It becomes.

2. Initial invention 2
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 1 Same as the original invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 2 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
When the first condition is satisfied (for example, when the process proceeds to step S742 in FIG. 58), the count value for determining whether or not the first time (external signal output time) has elapsed is stored. 1 storage area (F021 (H)) and
When the second condition is satisfied (for example, when the process proceeds to step S326 in FIG. 51), the count value for determining whether or not the second time (reel stop reception waiting time) has elapsed is stored. With a second storage area (F022 (H))
When the timing for updating the count value (step S605 in FIG. 54) comes, at least the update process for updating the count value stored in the first storage area and the second storage area (step S633 in FIG. 55) is performed. Run and
In the update process,
When the count value before the update is "N (N ≧ 1)", the count value is updated to "N-1" by subtraction.
When the count value before the update is "0", the count value is left as "0".

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 2 According to the original invention, the process of updating the count value can be uniformly executed without performing the process of determining whether or not the count value before the update is "0". The program for updating the count value can be simplified.

3. 3. Initial invention 3
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 3 Same as the original invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 3 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
When the first condition is satisfied (for example, when the process proceeds to step S742 in FIG. 58), the count value for determining whether or not the first time (external signal output time) has elapsed is stored. 1 storage area (F021 (H)) and
When the second condition is satisfied (for example, when the process proceeds to step S326 in FIG. 51), the count value for determining whether or not the second time (reel stop reception waiting time) has elapsed is stored. With a second storage area (F022 (H))
The address of the first storage area and the address of the second storage area are arranged consecutively,
When it is time to update the count value
a) A value (F021 (H)) for specifying the address value of the first storage area is stored in a register (HL register) (step S631 in FIG. 55).
b) The count value of the first storage area is subtracted by "1" based on the value of the register (step S633).
c) The address of the second storage area is specified by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to the value of the register (addition in the first embodiment, but subtraction in, for example, second embodiment C). Update to the value to be (step S634),
d) The count value of the second storage area is subtracted by "1" based on the value of the register (step S633).
As a result, the count values in the first storage area and the second storage area can be updated each time the count value is updated (step S605 in FIG. 54).

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 3 According to the initial invention, it is possible to continuously update a plurality of types of storage areas only by executing a register update process and a count value subtraction process.

4. Initial invention 4
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 4 Same as the original invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 4 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The first solution (first embodiment; FIGS. 31, 55) is
A plurality of storage areas (F021 (H) to F02D (H)) for storing count values for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed, and
It is equipped with a count value updating means (timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) in FIG. 55) capable of updating the count value of each storage area in a predetermined cycle (interrupt cycle every 2.235 ms).
The storage area is
M (M ≧ 1) (7) storage areas X (F021 (H) to F027 (H)) that can store count values consisting of 1 byte,
N (N ≧ 1) (3) storage areas Y (F028 (H) to F02D (H)) that are continuously arranged in M storage areas X and can store count values consisting of 2 bytes. Have,
The count value updating means is
A value for specifying a predetermined address (F021 (H)) is stored in a register (HL register) (step S631).
A 1-byte timer subtraction process (step S633) including at least a process of subtracting the count value of the storage area X by "1" based on the value of the register (step S633) and a process of updating the value of the register (step S634). ~ S635) is executed,
A 2-byte timer subtraction process (steps S637 to S639) including at least a process (step S637) of subtracting the count value of the storage area Y by "1" based on the value of the register after the 1-byte timer subtraction process is completed. It is characterized by executing.

The second solution (for example, second embodiment A, FIG. 61, FIG. 62) is
A plurality of storage areas (F021 (H) to F02D (H)) for storing count values for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed, and
It is equipped with a count value updating means (timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) in FIG. 62) capable of updating the count value of each storage area in a predetermined cycle (interrupt cycle every 2.235 ms).
The storage area is
M (M ≧ 1) (3) storage areas X (F028 (H) to F02D (H)) that can store count values consisting of 2 bytes,
N (7) storage areas Y (F021 (H) to F027 (H)) that are continuously arranged in M storage areas X and can store count values consisting of 1 byte. Have,
The count value updating means is
A value that identifies a predetermined address is stored in a register (step S771), and the value is stored.
A 2-byte timer subtraction process (step S773) including at least a process of subtracting the count value of the storage area X by "1" based on the value of the register (step S774) and a process of updating the value of the register (step S773). ~ S775),
1-byte timer subtraction processing (steps S777 to S779) including at least a processing (step S778) of subtracting "1" from the count value of the storage area Y based on the value of the register after the 2-byte timer subtraction processing is completed. It is characterized by executing.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 4 According to the initial invention, the count value of a plurality of storage areas having a storage area consisting of 1 byte and a storage area consisting of 2 bytes can be updated by a simple method.

5. Initial invention 5
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 5 In a conventional gaming machine, when determining whether or not the count value consisting of 2 bytes (upper 1 byte, lower 1 byte) is "0", the upper byte It is necessary to judge the values of both the lower byte and the lower byte, and there is a problem that program processing is required accordingly.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is that when updating the count value of the 2-byte storage area, whether or not the original count value of the 2-byte storage area is "0" is determined by the upper byte and the lower byte. It is to be feasible without judging both values of.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 5 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution is
A 2-byte count value (0B7D (0B7D) for determining whether or not a predetermined time (medal payout device control time) has elapsed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the process proceeds to step S255 of FIG. 46). It is provided with a 2-byte storage area (F028 (H) and F029 (H)) for storing H)).
When it is time to update the count value (step S605 in FIG. 54), the count value in the storage area is subtracted by "1" (step S637 in FIG. 55).
When the value of the upper byte of the 2-byte count value becomes "0", it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed.
The second solution is in the first solution.
Assuming that the predetermined time has elapsed when the initial value "x (H)" (0A7E (H)) becomes "0" as the count value, the value of the high-order byte becomes "0". The initial value "x + y (H)" (y = FF (H), x + y = 0B7D (H)), which is determined to have passed the predetermined time when the predetermined time is satisfied, is stored in the memory when the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is characterized by storing in an area.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 5 According to the initial invention, when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed, it is only necessary to determine whether or not the value of the upper byte is "0" (lower). (Because there is no need to read and judge the value of bytes), the program capacity can be reduced and the processing speed can be increased.

6. Initial invention 6
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 6 Same as the original invention 5.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 6 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
On condition that a predetermined time (minimum game time; 1837 interrupt) has elapsed from a predetermined time point (step S312 in FIG. 50), the game can proceed (in FIG. 50, the process after step S312 can proceed).
A 2-byte storage area (F02C (H) and F02D (H)) for storing a 2-byte count value for determining whether or not the predetermined time has elapsed is provided.
When it is time to update the count value (step S605 in FIG. 54), the count value in the storage area is subtracted by "1" (step S637 in FIG. 55).
On condition that the value of the upper byte among the count values of 2 bytes becomes "0", it is determined that the predetermined time has passed ("Yes" in step S311 of FIG. 50), and the game can proceed. It is characterized by doing.
In the embodiment, the timer value "072C (H)" corresponding to the minimum game time (1837 interrupt) plus "FF (H)" is added to "082B (H)" to store a 2-byte storage area (F02C (F02C (F02C)). Store in H) and F02D (H)).
(C) Effect of the original invention 6 Same as the original invention 5.

7. Initial invention 7
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 7 Same as the original invention 5.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 7 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A game medium payout device (medal payout device) having a drive unit (hopper motor 36) for paying out the game medium (medal) is provided.
When the operation of the drive unit is started (step S256 in FIG. 46), the drive unit is operated until a predetermined time (medal payout device control time; 2687 interrupt) elapses.
A 2-byte storage area (F028 (H) and F029 (H)) for storing a 2-byte count value for determining whether or not the predetermined time has elapsed is provided.
When it is time to update the count value (step S605 in FIG. 54), the count value in the storage area is subtracted by "1" (step S637 in FIG. 55).
When the value of the upper byte among the 2-byte count values becomes "0", it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed ("Yes" in step S257), and the operation of the drive unit is stopped (step). S260)
It is characterized by that. In the embodiment, the timer value "0A7E (H)" corresponding to the medal payout device control time (2687 interrupt) plus "FF (H)" is added to "0B7D (H)" to store a 2-byte storage area (2 bytes). It is stored in F028 (H) and F029 (H)).
(C) Effect of the original invention 7 Same as the original invention 5.

8. Initial invention 8
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 8 Same as the original invention 5.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 8 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention was
Equipped with a payout number display unit (acquired number display LED78) that displays the number of game media paid out.
After displaying the number of game media on the payout number display unit, a 2-byte count value for determining whether or not a predetermined time (game standby display start time; 26847 interrupts) has elapsed under certain conditions is stored. It has a byte storage area (F02A (H) and F02B (H)).
When it is time to update the count value (step S605 in FIG. 54), the count value in the storage area is subtracted by "1" (step S637 in FIG. 55).
When the value of the upper byte among the 2-byte count values becomes "0", it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed ("Yes" in step S161 of FIG. 42), and the payout number display unit is displayed. It is characterized in that the mode can be switched to a predetermined mode (“00”, “* 0”, or “**” (where “*” indicates extinguishing)).
In the embodiment, the timer value "68DE (H)" corresponding to the game standby display start time (26847 interrupts) plus "FF (H)" is added to "69DD (H)" in a 2-byte storage area (2 bytes). It is stored in F02A (H) and F02B (H)).
(C) Effect of the original invention 8 Same as the original invention 5.

10 Slot machine 11 Power switch 12 Setting key switch 13 Setting switch 14 Reset switch 15 Door switch 17 Display window 21 Direction lamp 22 Speaker 23 Image display device 24 Cross key 25 Menu button 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 36 Hopper motor 37 (37a, 37b) Payout sensor 40a 1-bet switch 40b 3-bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 43 Medal insertion slot 43a Passage sensor 44 (44a, 44b) Input sensor 45 Blocker 46 Settlement switch 50 Main control board (main control means)
51 Input port 52 Output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU
61 Winning flag control means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Push order instruction number selection means 64 Production group number selection means 65 Reel control means 66 Winning judgment means 67 Payout means 68 RT control means 69 Advantageous section control means 70 External signal transmission means 71 Control command Transmission means 73 Set value display LED (digit 5)
75 Display board 76 Storage number display LED (digits 1 and 2)
78 Number of acquisitions display LED (digits 3 and 4)
79 Status display LED
79a 1-bet display LED
79b 2-bet display LED
79c 3-bet display LED
79d Game start display LED
79e input display LED
79f replay display LED
79g production display LED
80 Sub control board (sub control means)
81 Input port (input port 0 to 2)
82 Output port (output port 0-7)
83 RWM
84 ROM
85 sub CPU
91 Production output control means 100 External centralized terminal board 200 Hall computer

Claims (1)

It is provided with a 2-byte storage area for storing a 2-byte count value for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
When it is time to update the count value, the count value in the storage area is subtracted by "1".
A gaming machine characterized in that when the value of the upper byte among the count values of 2 bytes becomes "0", it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed.

Images